PT CRUISER
2009 OWNER’S MANUAL
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 75
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................157
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................221
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 291
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................305
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................353
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 379
10
INDEX
...................................................................389
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction ........................... 4
䡵 How To Use This Manual .................. 4
䡵 Warnings And Cautions ................... 6
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6
䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............ 7
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. Please take
the time to read these publications carefully. Following
the instructions and recommendations in this manual
will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your
vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain description and
illustrations may differ from your vehicles equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
driver’s front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
vehicle registration or title.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫ Ignition Key Removal .................. 12
▫ Locking Doors With a Key ............... 14
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ............... 14
䡵 Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped ......... 14
▫ To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel ...... 14
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock ........ 15
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
System — If Equipped .................. 15
䡵 Sentry Key威 — If Equipped ............... 15
▫ Replacement Keys ..................... 16
▫ Sentry Key威 Programming ............... 17
▫ General Information ................... 18
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 18
▫ To Set The Alarm ..................... 19
▫ To Disarm The Alarm .................. 19
▫ Security System Manual Override ......... 20
2
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .............. 20
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ......... 21
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate .......... 22
▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” ....... 22
▫ Panic Alarm ......................... 23
▫ To Program Additional Transmitters ........ 23
▫ General Information ................... 25
▫ Transmitter Battery Service .............. 26
䡵 Door Locks ........................... 27
▫ Manual Door Locks ................... 27
▫ Power Door Locks .................... 28
▫ Child Protection Door Lock System —
If Equipped ......................... 30
䡵 Power Windows ....................... 31
▫ Auto-Down Feature ................... 32
▫ Rear Window Switches ................. 33
▫ Wind Buffeting ....................... 33
䡵 Liftgate ............................. 33
䡵 Occupant Restraints ..................... 35
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 36
▫ Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt Untwisting
Procedure ........................... 42
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Seat Belt
Anchorage .......................... 43
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ................. 43
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 44
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 45
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag ........... 45
▫ Child Restraints ...................... 62
▫ Transporting Pets ..................... 70
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 70
䡵 Safety Tips ........................... 71
▫ Transporting Passengers ................ 71
▫ Exhaust Gas ......................... 71
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 72
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 73
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the shift
lever knob pushbutton has returned to the outward
position. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position,
push the key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the
LOCK position, and remove the key.
Three Button Vehicle Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tem-
porarily in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the
key to the right slightly, then remove the key as de-
scribed. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK 3 — ON
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 4 — START
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Transaxle — If Equipped
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the
key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK
position, and remove the key.
Locking Doors with a Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward. To unlock the door, turn the
key forward. For door lock lubrication, refer to “Body
Lubrication” in the “Maintenance Procedures” section of
this manual.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open, and the key in the
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) will not function.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved
approximately a half turn in either direction and the key
is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Release the Steering Wheel Lock
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System —
If Equipped
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob pushbutton
is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the
key is in the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
SENTRY KEY姞 — IF EQUIPPED
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after two seconds of
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This
system utilizes ignition keys, which have an electronic
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle.
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless if the vehicle is locked or unlocked. During
normal operation, the Vehicle Security Light will come on
for three seconds immediately after the ignition switch is
turned on for a bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb
remains on, this indicates a problem with the electronics.
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds of running.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Keep in mind that an unprogrammed key is also consid-
ered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock
cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light comes on during normal
vehicle operation (when the vehicle has been running for
longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in the
electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not compat-
ible with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
•
Exxon/Mobil SpeedPass™, additional Sentry Keys威,
or any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
der) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other radio frequency
controlled electronics will not cause interference with
this system.
All of the keys provided with a new vehicle have been
programmed to that vehicle’s electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key威 has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
This PIN is required for replacement of keys by an
authorized dealer. Duplication of keys must be per-
formed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A
blank key is one which has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
authorized dealer.
Sentry Key姞 Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the indicator
light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn
off.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
The new Sentry Key威 has been programmed. The Re-
mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be
programmed during this procedure. Repeat this proce-
dure to program up to a total of eight keys. If you do not
have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your autho-
rized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the autho-
rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes. For the first three
minutes the horn will sound and the headlights, park
lights, tail lights and the Vehicle Security Light in the
cluster will flash. Then the exterior lights will flash for
another 15 minutes.
If the monitored Vehicle Security Alarm that triggered the
alarm is deactivated, the alarm will continue to sound
until three minutes of alarm time is reached. If the
monitored Vehicle Security Alarm that triggered the
alarm is deactivated, after the alarm has been on for three
minutes the alarm will shut off immediately.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Set the Alarm
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch,
or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, and close
all doors.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the
Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a
door is opened, the ignition switch is turned ON, or the
power door locks are unlocked by either the power door
lock switch or the RKE transmitter, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will automatically disarm. After 16 seconds, the
Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly. This shows that
the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed.
To Disarm the Alarm
Unlock a front door using the RKE transmitter.
Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry Key威 will disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm. A valid key is one that is
programmed to that particular vehicle. A valid key will
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. An invalid key will
trigger the alarm.
Tamper Alert
If the horn sounds three times when you unlock a front
door using the RKE transmitter, the alarm has been
activated. Check the vehicle for tampering.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances ap-
proximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held RKE trans-
mitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
Door Lock Plunger
Three Button Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice
to unlock all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK
button is pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate and
the parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock,” under
“Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features),”
in the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped” section of this manual for details.
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. For
EVIC-equipped vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driv-
er’s Door 1st,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features),” in the “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” section of this
manual. For non-EVIC-equipped vehicles, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least four
seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to
indicate that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE trans-
mitter.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-
LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To Lock the Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
If desired, the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature can be
turned on or off. For EVIC-equipped vehicles, refer to
“Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features),”
in the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped” section of this manual. For non-EVIC-
equipped vehicles, perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after four seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The “Sound Horn on Lock” feature can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure.
To Turn Off “Flash Lights with Lock”
NOTE: The “Flash Lights with Lock” feature can be
turned on or off. For EVIC-equipped vehicles refer to
⬙Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features),”
in the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped” section of this manual. For non-EVIC-
equipped vehicles, perform the following steps:
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after four
seconds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Test the “Flash Lights with Lock” feature while out-
side of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the
RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position,
and the key removed.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
The “Flash Lights on Lock” features can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure.
Panic Alarm
The Panic Alarm mode flashes the park lights, and
sounds the horn for about three minutes or until the
alarm is turned off.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF)
noises of the system.
To Program Additional Transmitters
Each vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant with two
RKE transmitters programmed only for that vehicle. A
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
total of eight RKE transmitters can be programmed to
your vehicle through the use of a currently-programmed
RKE transmitter.
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional EVIC in
the instrument cluster, the RKE transmitters may also be
programmed through the EVIC display.
Use the following procedure to program additional RKE
transmitters if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry
Key威:
NOTE: When entering program mode using currently-
programmed RKE transmitter, all other programmed
transmitters will be erased and you will have to repro-
gram them for your vehicle.
1. Gather every transmitter that is to be used with the
vehicle, including any transmitters that are currently
programmed.
2. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
3. Fasten your seatbelt. (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
any chimes that may confuse you during this program-
ming procedure.)
4. Place the key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Do not start the
engine.
6. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter.
7. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within six seconds.
8. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.
The chime is an indication that you have successfully
entered program mode. All RKE transmitters that are to
be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of
when the chime was heard.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Using the RKE transmitter to be programmed, press
and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons,
simultaneously.
10. A single chime will be heard.
11. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
12. A single chime will be heard.
13. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six
additional RKE transmitters.
14. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
15. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to
60 seconds from when the original chime was heard.
After 60 seconds, all programmed RKE transmitters
function normally.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed RKE trans-
mitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Service
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
elastomer seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key
is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Door Lock Plunger
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors while you drive,
when you park, and when leaving the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries and death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is on each front door panel. Press
either switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Lock — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
5. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
The Auto Lock feature can be enabled or disabled. Refer
to “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped” section of this manual for details.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Auto Lock
can be enabled or disabled by performing the following
procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON, and
back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
Auto Unlock — If Equipped
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2. The shift lever was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped” section of this manual.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Auto
Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON, and
back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock
the doors.
4. Verify reprogramming by driving the vehicle.
NOTE: Use the Auto Lock and Auto Unlock features in
accordance with local laws.
Child Protection Door Lock System — If
Equipped
To provide a safer environment for children riding in a
rear seat, the rear doors have the Child Protection Door
Lock system.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To use the system, open each rear door and move the
control up to engage. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child Door Protection
Lock is engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (UNLOCKED position), roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
POWER WINDOWS
The power window switches are located on the instru-
ment panel above the radio. The top left switch controls
the left front window and the top right switch controls
the right front window.
The lower left switch controls the left rear window and
the lower right switch controls the right rear window.
Child Lock Control
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
The window lock switch is located between the window
switches, that allows you to disable the rear window
switches that are located at the back of the center floor
console.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s and passenger’s front window switches
have an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch
past the detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically. Press the switch a second time in either
direction to stop the window.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
Power Window Switches
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window Switches
There are also rear passenger window switches located at
the rear of the center console.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked by pressing twice on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter button or by
activating the power door lock switches located on the
front doors.
Power Rear Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release
touch pad located on the backside of the liftgate handle,
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at HIGH
speed. DO NOT use the RECIRCULATION mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Liftgate Handle
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include:
•
Front and rear seat belts for all passengers
•
Front airbags for both the driver and front passenger
•
Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front
seat belts
•
Knee Impact Blocker panels for front seat occupants
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
that span the front and second rows for sedans (if
equipped)
•
Front seat belt retractors that incorporate pretension-
ers to enhance occupant protection by managing oc-
cupant energy during an impact event
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature can also be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems.
Refer to the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) system explanation in this section.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can best take the forces of a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision,
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the rear seatback is not fully latched. This prevents
someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
when the rear seatback is not fully latched.
NOTE:
•
If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be pulled
out, check that the rear seatback is fully latched.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
•
If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear
center lap/shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out, the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be
able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing
has been returned back into the retractor.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lockout feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in
the fully upright and locked position when occupied.
If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked
and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled
out of the retractor, the vehicle should immediately
be taken to your authorized dealer for service. Failure
to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal
injury.
Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Seat Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push up or down on the anchorage button to
release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the
position that fits you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) (see the following Airbag sec-
tion). Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are single-
use items. After a collision that is severe enough to
deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be
replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt has not been
buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, and if
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert威)
will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. If the driver unbuckles the seat
belt while the vehicle is in motion an immediate chime
will be heard and BeltAlert威 will continue to chime and
flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until
the driver’s seat belt is buckled. BeltAlert威 will be
reactivated if the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE:
•
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your autho-
rized dealer.
•
Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert威.
If BeltAlert威 is deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat belt
remains unfastened.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
Front Airbag Components
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
⬙Occupant Classification System⬙ in this section).
If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags, they are
located inside the driver and front passenger seats, and
their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers
or attempt to manually open them. You may dam-
age the airbags and you could be injured because
the airbags are not there to protect you. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de-
signed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not attach cup holders or any other objects on or
around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the object into occupants, causing serious
injury.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
the driver inflatable knee blocker to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be trig-
gered. But even in collisions where the airbags work, you
need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for
the airbags to protect you properly.
NOTE: The passenger front airbag may not deploy even
when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi-
fication System (refer to ⬙Occupant Classification System⬙
in this section) has determined the passenger seat is
empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the
“child⬙ category. This could be a child, a teenager, or even
a small adult.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see Section on Child Restraints) should
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraint.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against
the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accomodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If
You Need Assistance⬙ in Section 9 of this manual.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
If the vehicle has side airbags, they also need room
to inflate. Do not lean against the door. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller
•
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If equipped)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Passenger Airbag
•
Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags (If equipped)
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Interconnecting Wiring
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
•
Front Acceleration Sensors
•
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Occupant Classification System (OCS) for the Front
Passenger Seat
−
Occupant Classification Module
−
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
−
Weight Sensors
How The Airbag System Works
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may
also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant
size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.
The ORC will not detect roll over.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light and PAD indicator light in the instrument
panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a self-check when
the ignition is first turned on. After the self-
check, the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. The PAD
indicator light will function normally (Refer to ⬙Passen-
ger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light⬙ in this section).
If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound
if the light comes on again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you
in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
•
The
Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system required for this ve-
hicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag
for occupants that weigh less than a very small adult.
NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
•
The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system.
Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers push-
ing down on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In
this case, the OCS has classified the occupant of the
seat as an adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a
normal position (with their feet on or near the floor) in
order to be properly classified. Reclining the seat back
too far may change how an occupant is classified by
the OCS.
•
The Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
front passenger airbag is turned off. The PAD Indica-
tor lamp illuminates the words ⬙PASS AIR BAG OFF⬙
to show that the front passenger airbag will not inflate
during a collision requiring airbags. When the right
front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the passenger air bag
will not inflate even though the Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) indicator lamp is not illuminated.
•
The PAD indictor light should not be illu-
minated when an adult passenger is prop-
erly seated in the front passenger seat. In
this case, the air bag is ready to be inflated if
a collision requiring an airbag occurs.
For all other occupants, the PAD indicator light will be
illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag
is turned off and will not inflate.
NOTE:
Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years and under
should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint (see section on child restraints).
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
airbag. A deploying passenger airbag can cause death
or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat.
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Passenger Air-
bag Disable
(PAD) Indicator
Light
Airbag Status
Adult OFF ON
Child ON OFF
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Briefcases
and Other Rela-
tively Light Ob-
jects
ON OFF
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Passenger Air-
bag Disable
(PAD) Indicator
Light
Airbag Status
Empty or Very
Small Objects
OFF* OFF
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improp-
erly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back
does not touch anything placed on the second row of
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning
Light (a red light located in the center of the instrument
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on
whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light
are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is
turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged
under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight
sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the
lodged object is removed, the fault will be automatically
cleared after a short period of time.
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
may be possible based on collision severity and occu-
pant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
•
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to
determine whether the front passenger airbag should
be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag
inflation during a collision.
•
Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
•
The Side Impact (SRS) Seat Mounted Side Airbags
(If equipped) are designed to activate only in certain
side collisions.
The ORC module determines if a side collision is
severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate.
The side airbag control module will not detect roll
over, front or rear collisions.
The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON positions. These include all of the items
previously mentioned.
In moderate to severe side collisions, the side airbag
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered,
releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The inflating side
airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between
the occupant and the door. The side airbag moves at a
very high speed and with such a high force, that it could
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
side curtain air bags, do not install a clothing bar
mounted to the coat hooks (or similarly mounted). A
clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the
bags.
•
When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a
collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee
Blocker, it signals the inflator unit. A quantity of
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflat-
able Knee Blocker. The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
inflates rearward towards the driver’s knees to help
protect the knees and position you for the best inter-
action with the front airbag. The Driver Inflatable
Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds,
this is only about half of the time it takes you to blink
your eyes. It then quickly deflates while helping to
protect the driver’s knees.
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees, and
position everyone for the best interaction with the
front airbag.
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com-
ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy-
ment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo-
nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•
Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
•
At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front seat
passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
airbag control modules detect a moderate-to-severe col-
lision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and
then immediately deflate.
NOTE:
A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-
product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Classification System serviced as well.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modi-
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice.
•
If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion
needs to be serviced in any way (including re-
moval or loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer.
•
Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may
be used. If it is necessary to modify an advanced
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact
your authorized dealer.
(Continued)
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not place or hang any items such as add-on
video players on the front seat backs. The addi-
tional weight may cause the Occupant Classifica-
tion System to be unable to correctly classify the
right front occupant. This could allow the passen-
ger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired.
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee blocker panel.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occur, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately:
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during
the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned on.
•
The light remains on after the six to eight second
interval.
•
The light comes on and remains on while driving.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deploy-
ment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the
possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order
to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition
to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such
investigations may be requested by customers, insurance
carriers, government officials, and professional crash
researchers, such as those associated with universities,
and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its
designated representative will first obtain permission of
the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the elec-
tronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a
court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).
A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
upon request. General data that does not identify par-
ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo-
ration in aggregate crash databases, such as those main-
tained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confi-
dentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by
Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC
product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
•
⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Impact velocity and angle
•
Seat belt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Transmission gear selection
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
•
Cruise control status
•
Traction/stability control status
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System status (if equipped)
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats. Both types of child
restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder
belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system.
•
This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the
installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn
babies at the right front passenger seat position. If a car
bed must be used to transport a newborn baby, the car
bed must be installed in the second seating row only.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
less than one year old.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
•
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.nhtsa.gov or www.seatcheck.org or
call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be
switched to an Automatic Locking Mode, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the
belt tight; however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary.
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, please refer to
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) in this section.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt from the
retractor until there is enough to pass it through the child
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then
pull on the belt until it is fully extended from the
retractor. Allow the belt to return into the retractor,
pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion
around the child restraint. Follow the instructions of the
child restraint manufacture.
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
have lower and tether anchorages that are capable of
accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having
flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child
seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific
type of lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-
compatible child seats such that two seats share a com-
mon lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating
positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehi-
cle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use
the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your child
restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only in-
stall the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Please refer to, Installing the Child Restraint System for
typical installation instructions.
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage, have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
LATCH Anchors
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger-carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages. The
tether strap should be routed under the center of the head
restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of
the seatback. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-
compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat
belts.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
Children too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Procedures”
in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR
STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors .............................. 79
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 79
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver Side ............ 79
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger Side .......... 80
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 80
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 81
▫ Sun Visor Sliding Feature ............... 81
䡵 uconnect威 phone — If Equipped ............ 82
▫ Operation .......................... 84
▫ Phone Call Features ................... 91
▫ uconnect威 phone Features ............... 94
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ............ 99
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
uconnect威 phone ..................... 101
▫ General Information .................. 110
䡵 Seats .............................. 110
▫ Front Seat Adjustment — If Equipped ...... 110
▫ Six-Way Power Seat With Manual Recliner —
If Equipped .........................111
3
▫ Manual Lumbar — If Equipped .......... 112
▫ Folding Front Passenger Seat —
If Equipped ........................ 113
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints ............. 114
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 114
▫ Folding Rear Seat .................... 116
▫ Tumbling Rear Seat ................... 118
▫ Rear Seat Removal ................... 120
䡵 Emergency Seatback Release .............. 122
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ............ 123
䡵 Lights ............................. 125
▫ Map/Reading Lights .................. 125
▫ Headlights ......................... 126
▫ Parking And Instrument Panel Lights ...... 126
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped ........................ 127
▫ Lights — On Reminder ................ 127
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 128
▫ Turn Signal Operation ................. 128
▫ High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...... 129
▫ Flash-To-Pass ....................... 130
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 130
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation ............ 130
▫ Intermittent Wiper System .............. 131
▫ Windshield Washers .................. 132
▫ Mist Feature ........................ 132
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Tilt Steering Column ................... 132
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 133
▫ To Activate ......................... 134
▫ To Set a Desired Speed ................ 134
▫ To Deactivate ....................... 134
▫ To Resume Speed .................... 134
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 135
▫ Manual Transaxle .................... 135
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .............. 136
▫ Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills .... 136
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 136
▫ Programming HomeLink威 .............. 137
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 141
▫ Security ........................... 141
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 142
▫ General Information .................. 142
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 143
▫ Express-Open Feature ................. 143
▫ Wind Buffeting ...................... 144
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ................. 145
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ................. 145
䡵 Storage ............................. 147
▫ Center Console/Armrest Storage Bin ...... 147
▫ Storage Pockets ..................... 148
䡵 Console Features ...................... 148
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
䡵 Rear Shelf Panel — If Equipped ........... 149
▫ Position 1 (Top) ..................... 150
▫ Position 2 (Middle) ................... 150
▫ Position 3 (Floor) .................... 151
▫ Position 4 (Vertical) ................... 152
▫ Position 5 (Table) .................... 152
䡵 Rear Window Features .................. 154
▫ Rear Window Defroster ................ 154
▫ Rear Wiper/Washer Switch — If Equipped . . 155
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Outside Mirror — Driver Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located to the left of the
steering column on the instrument panel. To adjust the
view in the outside mirrors, turn the rotary knob to the L
(Left), O (Center) or R (Right) position. After selecting the
mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the
mirror to move. Use the O (Center) position to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
Power Mirror Switch
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an illuminated
vanity mirror located on the sun visor. To use the mirror,
rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover
upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover turns off the lights.
NOTE:
•
The driver vanity mirror will become inoperable when
the vehicle alarm is enabled.
•
The passenger vanity mirror will become inoperable if
left on for more than 10 minutes.
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors are designed to slide outward along the
support shaft to provide extended coverage of the wind-
shield and door glass.
1. Rotate the sun visor downward
2. Pull the visor forward to remove if from the swivel
clip
3. Slide the visor outwards along the shaft to the desired
position.
To store the sun visor to its original position, reverse the
above process.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
uconnect姞 phone — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an
integrated uconnect威 phone. Refer to your “Navigation
User’s Manual” for uconnect威 phone operating instruc-
tions for these radios. Radio sales code can be located
on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate.
uconnect威 phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. uconnect威 allows you to
dial a phone number with your cellular phone using
simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or
⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is
transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the
system will automatically mute your radio when using
the uconnect威 phone.
NOTE: The uconnect威 phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the uconnect威 website for sup-
ported phones.
For uconnect威 customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
uconnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the sys-
tem and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The uconnect威 phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone. uconnect威 features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so uconnect威 phone
works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
uconnect威 phone. The uconnect威 phone allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The uconnect威 phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
uconnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellular
phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset Profile)
you may not be able to use any uconnect威 phone
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The uconnect威 phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the uconnect威 phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the uconnect威 phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect威
phone and to navigate through the uconnect威 phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
uconnect威 phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
uconnect威 phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The uconnect威 phone will play all the options at
any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the uconnect威 phone from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All uconnect威 phone sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) uconnect威 phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your uconnect威 phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions
for pairing.
The following are general phone to uconnect威 phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the uconnect威 phone a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your uconnect威 phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your uconnect威 phone. The priority
allows the uconnect威 phone to know which cellular
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
uconnect威 phone will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
•
The uconnect威 phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the uconnect威 phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
uconnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
•
The uconnect威 system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Add Names to Your uconnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the uconnect威 phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The uconnect威 phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, uconnect威 phone automati-
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Cellular Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
uconnect威 phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See uconnect威
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from downloaded (or uconnect威)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the uconnect威 phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the uconnect威 phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu-
lar phone is accessible.
•
Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the uconnect威 phone. These can only be
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to uconnect威 phone on the next
phone connection.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, uconnect威
phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
PHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” The
system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phone-
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the uconnect威 phone, and then send the address book
entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone Owner’s
Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the
Bluetooth威 connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
Delete uconnect威 Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
while the uconnect威 phone is playing the desired entry
and say ⬙Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the name, the uconnect威 phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The uconnect威 phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the uconnect威 Phonebook
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The uconnect威 phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button during the playing of the
desired name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
•
The uconnect威 phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
uconnect威 phone if the feature(s) are available on your
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the uconnect威 phone. Check with your
cellular service provider for the features that you have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
uconnect威 phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.
Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The uconnect威 phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙Dial⬙
or ⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,
refer to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To
combine two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this
section.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOG-
NITION button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
Call While Current Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second
call has established, press and hold the PHONE button
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls
have been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Redial
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The uconnect威 phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
uconnect威 phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
uconnect威 phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect威 phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the uconnect威 phone and
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect威 phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the uconnect威 phone to the cellular phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
OFF.
uconnect姞 phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the uconnect威 phone is
using:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every uconnect威 phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect威 phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the uconnect威 phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
•
The uconnect威 phone does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the
cellular phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
uconnect威 phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cellular phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect威
phone.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico).
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the uconnect威 phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your uconnect威 phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the uconnect威 phone.
When calling a number with your uconnect威 phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish
to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if
required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4
6 #), you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying a number, or sequence of
numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service cen-
ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored uconnect威 phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The uconnect威 phone will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a...,⬙ you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without
having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the uconnect威 phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The uconnect威 phone will play
the current confirmation prompt status and you will
be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the uconnect威 phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using uconnect威 phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the uconnect威 phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The uconnect威 phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the uconnect威 phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the uconnect威 phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the uconnect威 phone:
•
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the uconnect威 phone:
•
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The uconnect威 phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect威 phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your uconnect威 phone paired cellular phone to the
uconnect威 phone or vice versa, press the VOICE REC-
OGNITION button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
uconnect威 phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a uconnect威 phone paired cellular
phone and the uconnect威 phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
•
The uconnect威 phone will play the phone names of all
paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired phone
being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNITION
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the uconnect威 phone.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
uconnect威 phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete uconnect威 phone Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your uconnect姞
phone
uconnect威 phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “uconnect威 Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the uconnect威
phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the uconnect威 phone mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
•
Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for
five seconds until the session begins, or,
•
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
uconnect威 phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the uconnect威 phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and uconnect威 phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries
are not similar.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the uconnect威 phone.
•
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the uconnect威 phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
uconnect威 Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
SEATS
Front Seat Adjustment — If Equipped
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat to the
desired position.
Manual Adjusting Bar
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Six-Way Power Seat With Manual Recliner — If
Equipped
The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near
the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up or down,
forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat.
Power Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to
the rear of the power seat switch. To recline, lean forward
slightly before lifting the lever, then lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and
lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat
belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision you could slide under the seat belt and be
seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Lumbar — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment is located on the inboard side of
the driver’s seat. To increase support, rotate the handle
down.
Recliner Control Lever
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
The passenger front seat may be folded fully forward to
provide additional cargo space.
To fold the seat forward, pull up on the recliner lever
located on the outboard side of the seat.
Lumbar Adjust Handle
Folding Seat Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of a rear impact. Adjust the height of a head
restraint to a position that is appropriate for the height of
the person using the seat. To raise a head restraint, pull
up on the head restraint. To lower a head restraint, push
in the button that is part of the head restraint rod guide,
and push down on the head restraint.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion
and seatback. The driver and front passenger seats are
heated. The controls for each heater are located near the
bottom center of the instrument panel.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
Off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut Off the heating elements.
If High-level heating is selected, the system automatically
switches to Low-level heating and turns one indicator
light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation. It will
turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after
an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation. If
Low-level heating is selected, the system automatically
turns the heater and the indicator light off after 30 min-
utes of continuous operation.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat.
CAUTION!
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. To avoid heated seat
surfaces coming in contact and potential seat over-
heating, always ensure that the seat heater is in the
Off position (amber lights are on for High or Low
and no amber lights for the Off position) before
placing any of the seats into a folded flat position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. To fold down either seatback, push
the button that is located on the top of the seatback near
the outboard side, and push or pull the seatback forward.
When returning the seatback to its upright position,
make sure that the seatback latch is engaged. You should
not be able to fold the seatback forward unless the release
button is pressed or the emergency release handle is
pulled. Do not allow passengers to ride in a rear seat if
the seatback latch is not engaged.
WARNING!
•
Do not ride in any of the rear seating positions
when one or more of the seat latches is not
engaged. Riding with the seat latches disengaged
could result in serious or fatal injury.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
(Continued)
Folding Rear Seat Button
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
NOTE:
•
If the rear center lap/shoulder belt appears to be
locked into place, check to verify that the seatback is
fully latched.
•
If the seatback is properly latched and the rear center
lap/shoulder belt still does not operate properly, check
and see if the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
system is activated.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lockout feature to ensure that the seatback is in the
fully upright and locked position when occupied. If
the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and
the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled out of
the retractor, the vehicle should immediately be
taken to an authorized dealer for service. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious or fatal
injury.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Tumbling Rear Seat
To provide additional storage in the cargo area, each rear
seat can be tumbled forward.
CAUTION!
It is important that the front seats be pulled forward
to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact
between the rear seat and the front seatback. If the
front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will
make contact during the tumbling motion and cause
damage to the rear seat material. After the rear seat is
tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then
be repositioned to the preferred position.
1. Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
down the rear seatback.
2. Pull the release handle located on the outboard side of
the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
Folding Rear Seat Button
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Attach the tether, located at the base of the seat
cushion, onto the hook bar on the center trim panel to
hold the seat in place.
To return the rear seat to its upright latched position,
rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat. Then
lift the seatback to its upright latched position.
Tumbling Seat Release Strap Tumbling Seat Tether
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
When returning the seatback to its upright position,
make sure that the seat latches are engaged. You should
not be able to fold the seatback forward and/or tumble
the seat unless the release button is pressed, the emer-
gency release handle is pulled and/or the tumbling seat
release strap is pulled. Do not allow passengers to ride in
a rear seat if one or more of the seat latches is not
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not ride in any of the rear seating positions when
one or more of the seat latches is not engaged. Riding
with the seat latches disengaged could result in
serious or fatal injury.
NOTE: The tumbling seat tether should be clipped onto
the elastic strap provided on the base of the seat cushion
before returning the seat to its normal position.
Rear Seat Removal
The rear seats can be removed to provide more cargo
space.
1. Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
down the rear seatback.
Folding Rear Seat Button
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the release lever located on the outboard side of
the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
3. Lift up the release levers to disengage the seat from the
floor attachments.
4. Using the handle on the seat, the seat assembly can
now be lifted and removed from the vehicle.
NOTE: Small rollers on the bottom of the folded seat
and a handle at the top allow the seat to be easily moved
when removed from the vehicle.
Tumbling Seat Release Strap
Release Lever Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
To reinstall the rear seat, insert the seat into the floor
attachments. Lower the release levers of the seat to latch
the front floor attachments and rotate the seat rearward
to latch the seat. Lift the seatback to its upright latched
position.
WARNING!
In an accident, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
EMERGENCY SEATBACK RELEASE
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the liftgate
area with the rear shelf panel in position 1 (Top) or
position 2 (Middle), either by climbing into the
liftgate from outside, or through the inside of the
vehicle. Always close the liftgate when your vehicle
is unattended. Once in the liftgate area, young chil-
dren may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the liftgate,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
As a security measure, a Seatback Emergency Release
lever is built into the left side rear seatback latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked
inside the liftgate area with the rear shelf panel in
position 1 (Top) or position 2 (Middle), the left side rear
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
seatback can be unlatched by pulling down on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the left rear seatback
latching mechanism.
Once unlatched the seatback can be pushed forward to
gain access into the interior of the vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure that the elastic loop is around the
emergency release handle at all times. If the handle is
pulled downward, entirely through the elastic loop, the
handle will not return to its original position and the
seatback may not operate properly.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
Emergency Seatback Release
1 — Rear Shelf Position 1
2 — Rear Shelf Position 2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Move the safety latch, located under the front edge of
the hood, slightly to the right of center and raise the
hood.
Use the hood prop rod clipped to the driver’s side of the
engine compartment to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the hood prop at the location stamped into
the inner hood surface.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Latch
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 8 in (20 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rearview mirror. Each light is turned on by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light off. The lights also come on when a door is opened
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
Map Reading Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. These lights will automati-
cally shut off 10 minutes after the ignition is OFF. Further
use of the lights, without starting the vehicle, will pro-
vide 90 seconds of activity prior to automatic shut off.
Headlights
The headlight multifunction lever controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight
beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights, the passing lights and fog lights. The lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Parking and Instrument Panel Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for
headlight operation.
Headlight Control
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or
down.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The high beam lights will come on as DRL with a lower
intensity whenever the ignition is on, the engine is
running, the headlight switch is off, the parking brake is
off, the turn signal is off, and the shift lever is in any
position except PARK.
NOTE: On this vehicle, the DRL will automatically turn
off when the turn signal is in operation, and automati-
cally turn back on when the turn signal is not operating.
Lights — On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF and key is removed, a chime will sound to
alert the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Dimmer Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the multifunction
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the control lever.
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head-
lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signal Operation
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
Fog Lamp Control
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from the steering
wheel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the
lever toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights
back to low beam.
Turn Signal Control
High Beam, Low Beam, and Passing Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will turn on the high beam headlights
until the lever is released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
flash-to-pass operation.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. Rotate the
control to select the desired wiper speed.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the control to the second detent for low-speed
wiper operation, or to the third detent for high-speed
operation.
Wiper/Washer Switch
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the low continual speed position.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition
is turned to LOCK, the wiper will automatically return to
the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wipers will resume operation.
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low-speed for
two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn off.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.
Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired. Pull up on the
lever to lock the column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Lever
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at approximately either 30 mph
(40 km/h ) or 35 mph (56 km/h) depending on the model
or engine size. The Electronic Speed Control lever is
located on the right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-
trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The CRUISE
indicator will turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set a Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, pull
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
While in the AutoStick威 mode, Electronic Speed Control
will only operate in 3rd and 4th gear.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever toward CANCEL, or normal brake
or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deacti-
vate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning
off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, pull the RESUME
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is ON, speed can be
increased by pulling up and holding RESUME ACCEL.
Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and
the new speed will be set.
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result ina2mph
(3 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is ON,
pull down and hold SET DECEL. Release the lever when
the desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be
set.
Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result ina1mph
(2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed decreases.
Manual Transaxle
Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the Electronic
Speed Control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the
Electronic Speed Control disengages is normal.
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to
be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed
loss.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
To Accelerate for Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
Vehicles equipped with four-speed automatic transaxles
may experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to 3rd
gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
HomeLink威 Buttons
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. Only use this trans-
ceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop
and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door opener
models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-
sistance.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Programming Homelink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
Begin Programming
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to
30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE:
•
Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
•
After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the ga-
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5 “Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code System.”
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Using HomeLink威
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming a Single Homelink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming Homelink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the “Learn” button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp.
Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position, press
and hold the switch rearward to fully open the sunroof.
The sunroof can be stopped at any position between
closed and full open. Momentarily pressing the switch
rearward will activate the Express-Open feature, causing
the sunroof to open automatically.
Press and hold the button in the center of the sunroof
switch to open the vent. The sunroof can be stopped at
any position between closed and full vent. To close the
sunroof from the vent position, press and hold the switch
forward. Releasing the switch will stop the movement of
the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial
vent position until the switch is pushed forward again.
Express-Open Feature
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open feature.
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed forward again.
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The 12-Volt power outlets include tethered caps, labeled
with a key symbol or battery symbol, indicating power
source. All outlets are protected by a single 20 Amp fuse.
The standard outlet in the front of the center floor console
is a conventional cigar lighter outlet.
It will accept a cigar lighter unit, which is part of the
optional Smokers Package. To preserve the heating ele-
ment of the cigar lighter unit, do not hold the lighter in
the heating position. As a child safety precaution, this
power outlet is powered by the ignition switch, only
when the switch is in the ON or ACC position.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
There is one optional power outlet located in the right
rear cargo area.
The rear power outlet is powered directly by the battery.
As an option, fuse #11 in the Integrated Power Module
(IPM), may be repositioned to allow power to come from
the ignition switch only, when in the ON or ACC
position.
NOTE: The rear power outlet will not accept a cigar
lighter unit as it is intended only for accessory items.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not use a three-prong adapter.
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Rear Power Outlet
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high-power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
STORAGE
Center Console/Armrest Storage Bin
The center console provides a sliding armrest with two
storage compartments under the lid.
Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise
the upper cover. Inside is an area to store a cellular phone
Sliding Armrest
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
and other miscellaneous items. Push the lower button on
the front of the armrest, and raise the armrest for access
to the lower storage bin. The lower storage area can be
used for storing up to six compact discs (CDs) and other
miscellaneous items.
Storage Pockets
There are storage pockets located on each door trim
panel.
CONSOLE FEATURES
The console has two front cupholders, a removable coin
holder, 12-Volt power outlet and a front storage tray.
There are three additional cupholders; one is molded in
the center of the console to hold large cups, and the
others are in the rear of the console to serve passengers in
the rear seat. The floor console power outlet will also
operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped
with an optional Smoker’s Package).
Sliding Armrest Storage Bins
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high-power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
REAR SHELF PANEL — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Shelf Panel attaches to guides in the rear cargo
area. The rear shelf panel may be installed in one of five
different positions.
NOTE: The liftgate may be opened or closed with the
rear cargo shelf panel in position 1, position 2, position 3
or position 4.
WARNING!
•
To avoid tipping, lock the shelf securely in all
positions.
•
Do not drive this vehicle with the liftgate open, or
use the shelf as a seat.
•
Failure to follow these warnings could result in
serious or fatal injury.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Position 1 (Top)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the top guides and slide forward. Press down on the back
of the shelf panel to lock it into place.
WARNING!
Do not load objects on the shelf in position 1 (top). In
an accident, objects could strike occupants causing
serious or fatal injury.
Position 2 (Middle)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the middle guides and slide forward. Press down on the
back of the shelf panel to lock it into place.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 1
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 2
(middle). Failure to follow this warning could cause
the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
Position 3 (Floor)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the bottom guides and slide forward.
NOTE: To carry items that may soil the carpeting, the
rear shelf panel may be inverted in position 2 or position
3.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Position 4 (Vertical)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the vertical guides behind the rear seatbacks near the
floor and slide downward. Push the shelf panel forward
to lock it by aligning the vertical guide with the rubber
stop of the shelf panel.
WARNING!
When in the vertical position, the rear shelf panel
should not be used as a barrier for large objects in the
cargo area with the seatbacks folded down. In an
accident objects could strike the seatbacks or occu-
pants causing serious or fatal injury.
Position 5 (Table)
With the liftgate open the rear shelf panel can be moved
rearward to act as a serving counter.
1. Align the front corners of the shelf panels with the lock
position on the backside of the top rear guides. Press
down on the shelf panel to lock it into place.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 4
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Twist the knob on the underside of the panel and
lower the shelf leg.
3. Install the shelf leg into the liftgate latch area as
labeled on the rear scuff plate.
WARNING!
Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 5
(table). Failure to follow this warning could cause the
shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
Rear Shelf Leg Release Knob
Rear Shelf Panel Position 5
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
center of the instrument panel, below the radio.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-
tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an addi-
tional five minutes of operation, press the button a
second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Wiper/Washer Switch — If Equipped
A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
operation of the Rear Wiper/Washer function. Rotating
the center of the switch forward to the on position will
activate the wiper. Rotating the center of the switch all
the way forward will turn on the wash function. The
washer pump will continue to operate as long as the
button is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two
times before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-
sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door. If this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to “Park”.
Rear Wiper Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features ............... 160
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Base ............... 161
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Premium ........... 162
䡵 Instrument Cluster — Turbo .............. 163
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 164
䡵 Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) —
If Equipped .......................... 174
▫ Compass Mini-Trip Computer Reset Button . . 174
▫ Compass/Temperature Display .......... 175
▫ Odometer Display .................... 177
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) ................. 177
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) –
If Equipped .......................... 178
▫ EVIC Operation ..................... 178
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock ................ 187
4
䡵 Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio
With Optional uconnect威 studios (Satellite
Radio), uconnect威 phone, And Video
Entertainment Systems (VES)™ Capabilities . . . 187
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ...... 188
▫ Operation Instructions -
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) .......... 193
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) .......... 194
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 196
▫ Operation Instructions -
(CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play) ......... 199
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For MP3 Play) .............. 199
䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single-Disc)
Radio With Optional uconnect威 studios
(Satellite Radio) And uconnect威 phone
Capability ........................... 201
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ...... 201
▫ Operating Instructions - CD Mode ........ 205
▫ Operating Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 207
▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect威 phone —
If Equipped ........................ 208
▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect威 studios
(Satellite Radio) — If Equipped .......... 208
䡵 uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped .......................... 209
▫ System Activation .................... 209
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 209
▫ Selecting uconnect威 studios (Satellite) Mode
In REF, And RAQ, Radios .............. 210
▫ Selecting a Channel ................... 210
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels ..... 211
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
(If Equipped) ....................... 211
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ .................... 211
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ .................... 211
▫ Satellite Antenna ..................... 211
▫ Reception Quality .................... 212
䡵 CD/DVD Maintenance ................. 212
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ....... 213
䡵 Climate Controls ...................... 213
▫ Climate Control Operation .............. 213
▫ Operating Tips ...................... 219
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Vent 5 — Radio 9 — TRAC Off 13 — Hazard Lights
2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Assist Handle 10 — Climate Controls 14 — Rear Window Defrost *
3 — Power Windows 7 — Glove Compartment 11 — Storage Cubby 15 — Side Mirror Control *
4 — Analog Clock 8 — Heated Seats * 12 — Pass Air Bag Off — If Equipped
* If Equipped
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — TURBO
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on
the front passenger’s (right) side of the vehicle.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call an authorized deal-
ership for service.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7
of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cool-
ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4. Speedometer
The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
5. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
6. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
7. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
8. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. U.S. federal regulations require that upon
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the
purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed
during repair or replacement, be sure to keep a record of
the reading before and after the service so that the correct
mileage can be determined.
Vehicle Warning Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, “door,” “gate,”
“LoW TirE,” “CHAngE OIL”or “GASCAP” will display
in the odometer.
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
then all warnings including ”Low Tire,” “Door Ajar” and
“Liftgate Ajar” will only display in the EVIC. (Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in this
section for specific messages).
LoW TirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three
cycles.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
GASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change
in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose,
improperly installed, or damaged, the words “GASCAP”
will display in the odometer. If this occurs, tighten the
fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset
button to turn off the “GASCAP” message. (Refer to
“Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in Section 7 of
this manual for more information). If the problem con-
tinues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle
is started. See your authorized dealer service center as
soon as possible.
9. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed
Control system is ON.
NOTE: The word “SET” will not illuminate when the
Electronic Speed Control System is on.
10. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON position, before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
If the MIL flashes when the engine is running, serious
conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip
mode to reset.
12. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
13. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
14. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).
15. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate
and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in Section 2 for more information.
17. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H , this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H , the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in Section 6
for more information.
18. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
19. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds while the Vehicle Security
Alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
20. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
21. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
23. Airbag Warning Light
This light turns on and remains on for seven
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
24. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
25. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Button—If Equipped
Pushing this button will switch between the different
EVIC functions.
Press the CMTC reset button to scroll through sub-menus
(i.e., Trip Functions: AVG Fuel Economy, DTE Elapsed
Time, and Units).
26. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display — If
Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC), when the appropriate conditions
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
exist, this display shows the EVIC messages. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in this section.
On vehicles equipped with Compass Mini-Trip Com-
puter (CMTC) the display provides the outside tempera-
ture, one of eight compass headings to indicate the
direction the vehicle is facing and the current radio
station. Refer to “Compass Mini-Trip Computer” in this
section.
COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer features a driver-
interactive display (displays information on outside tem-
perature, compass direction, and trip information). The
display is located on the lower left part of the cluster
below the fuel and engine temperature gauge.
Compass Mini-Trip Computer Reset Button
CMTC Reset Button — Secondary Reset Button
Press the left Compass/Temperature RESET button to
scroll through sub-menus (i.e., Trip Functions: AVG Fuel
Economy, DTE Elapsed Time, and Units (US or Metric).
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the window below the fuel and
engine temperature gauge:
E..................Eight-point compass headings
are displayed (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
14°F............ Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius)
AV G ..........AverageFuel Economy (US or Metric)
DTE .......................Distance to Empty
ET ............................ Elapsed Time
NOTE: Temperature and Average Fuel Economy can be
changed from U.S. or Metric. by pressing and holding the
(left) secondary pushbutton.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass/Temperature Display
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accu-
racy, the compass variance should be properly set accord-
ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle
will be driven. When properly set, the compass will
automatically account for this difference.
NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as
cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
panel. This is where the compass module is located and
such devices may interfere and cause false compass
readings.
To Set the Variance
Start the engine, and leave the transmission shift lever in
the PARK position. Press and hold (approximately ten
seconds) the compass/temperature RESET button until
the current variance zone number is displayed. To change
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
the zone, press and release the RESET button to incre-
ment the variance one step. Repeat as necessary, until the
desired variance is achieved.
NOTE: Zone 8 is the factory default. During program-
ming, the Zone Number will wrap around from Zone 15
to 1. Please refer to the Compass Variance Zone Map in
the following section: “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)”
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, eliminat-
ing the need to manually calibrate the compass. When
the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and
the CAL indicator message will flash in the CMTC until
the calibration is complete.
A good calibration requires a level surface and an envi-
ronment free from large metallic objects such as build-
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
Calibrate the compass by driving slowly, under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in one or more complete circles in a area free
from large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator in the
CMTC turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manu-
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1. Start the engine, and leave the transmission shift lever
in the PARK position.
2. Press and hold (approximately 10 seconds) the
Compass/Temperature RESET button until the current
variance zone number is displayed.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Release the RESET button, then press and hold again
(approximately 10 seconds), until the direction is dis-
played with the CAL indicator on continuously in the
display.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360 degree circles, under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large
metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
Odometer Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
CRUISE ...................... Cruise Activated
gASCAP .......................Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE .......................... Fuse Fault
These messages can be manually turned off by pressing
the right reset button (on the instrument cluster).
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the right button (on the instru-
ment cluster) to switch from odometer, to trip A or trip B.
Press and hold the right button while the odometer/trip
odometer is displayed, to reset.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last
reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED
EVIC Operation
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. The EVIC consists of the following:
•
System Status
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
•
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
•
Compass heading
•
Outside temperature display
•
Trip computer functions
•
uconnect™ hands-free communication system dis-
plays — if equipped
•
Audio mode display
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
•
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not In
(automatic transmission) or Vehicle Is In Motion
(manual transmission).
•
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime, if speed is above 1 mph)
•
Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime, if speed is above 1 mph)
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
•
Headlights On
•
Key In Ignition
EVIC Functions
Press the EVIC button until one of the following func-
tions are displayed on the EVIC:
•
Compass/Temperature/Audio
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
•
Elapsed Time
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
•
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
•
Personal Settings
To Reset the Display
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the
resettable function currently being displayed. Reset will
only occur if a resettable function is currently being
displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and
release the EVIC button a second time within three
seconds of resetting the currently-displayed function
(Reset ALL will be displayed during this three-second
window).
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing, the outside temperature, and the current radio
station.
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
to “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures)” in this section.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
RESET, or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
EVIC Button
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from where it was before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of LOW FUEL. This display will con-
tinue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a signifi-
cant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW
FUEL text and a new DTE value will be displayed, based
on the current values in the DTE calculation and the
current fuel tank level.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Refer to Section 5 “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS),” for system operation.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
shift lever is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmission).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Press and release the EVIC button until “Personal Set-
tings” is displayed in the EVIC.
Use the EVIC button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais depend-
ing on availability. As you continue, the displayed infor-
mation will be shown in the selected language.
NOTE: uconnect™ language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in the
“uconnect™ — If Equipped” section of this manual for
details.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH (24 Km/h)
When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON
or OFF appears, to make your selection.
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
(manual transmission) or the vehicle is stopped and the
shift lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL position (automatic
transmission). Press and hold the EVIC button when in
this display until ON or OFF appears to make your
selection.
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
When Driver’s Door 1st is selected, only the driver’s door
will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. A second press is
required to unlock the remaining locked doors. When
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Unlock All Doors is selected, all doors will
unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
button. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this
display until Driver’s Door 1st or All Doors appears, to
make your selection.
Sound Horn On Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights On
Lock/Unlock feature. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until ON or OFF appears, to make
your selection.
Flash Lights On Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the Sound Horn On Lock feature activated. Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON
or OFF appears, to make your selection.
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
your selection.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system, DVD video system,
power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for
up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned
OFF. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
OFF, 45 sec, 5 min, or 10 min appears, to make your
selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Turn Headlights on with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until OFF, 30 sec,
60 sec, or 90 sec appears, to make your selection.
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
U-Connect威 system are confirmed. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF
appears, to make your selection.
Display English or Metric
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system units can be
changed between English and METRIC.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
US or METRIC appears, to make your selection.
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, eliminat-
ing the need to manually calibrate the compass. When
the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and
the CAL indicator message will flash in the EVIC until
the calibration is complete.
A good calibration requires a level surface and an envi-
ronment free from large metallic objects such as build-
ings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
Calibrate the compass by driving slowly, under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in one or more complete circles in an area free
from large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE:
•
A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
tracks, etc.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Keep all magnetic objects, such as laptop computers,
iPod’s, cell phones and PDA’s (anything with a bat-
tery) away from the compass sensor which is located
in the top of the instrument panel. These devices can
interfere with compass accuracy and performance.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears to be inaccurate, you may wish to
manually calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the
compass, make sure the proper Compass Variance Value
is selected. (Refer to “Compass Variance” for additional
information). Then, continue to calibrate the compass as
follows:
1. Start the engine and leave the shift lever in the PARK
position.
2. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
the EVIC displays the Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features) menu.
3. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
“Calibrate Compass (Yes)” is displayed. A EVIC button
press (longer than two seconds) will place the compass in
calibration mode.
4. The CAL indicator will come on continuously in the
EVIC display, to indicate that the compass is now in the
calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven
to calibrate. Press the EVIC button from the ⬙Calibrate
Compass (Yes)⬙ screen to exit the EVIC Customer-
Programmable features, and return it to its normal oper-
ating mode.)
5. Drive the vehicle slowly, under 5 mph (8 km/h),
completing one or more circles (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns
off. The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass head-
ing.
To Set the Variance
Follow this procedure to set the Variance:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the
shift lever in PARK.
2. Press and release the EVIC button several times until
you have displayed the Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features) menu.
3. Press and release the EVIC button until “Compass
Variance” and the current variance zone number displays
in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the EVIC button to increment the
variance zone by one, (one button press per update), until
the proper variance zone number is selected according to
the map.
NOTE: Zone 8 is the factory default. During program-
ming, the Zone Number will wrap around from Zone 15
to 1.
Compass Variance Map
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Press and release the EVIC button to exit.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the button until the setting is
correct. The clock will adjust slowly at first, and then
more quickly the longer the button is held.
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
WITH OPTIONAL uconnect姞 studios (SATELLITE
RADIO), uconnect姞 phone, AND VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS (VES)™
CAPABILITIES
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Setting The Analog Clock
RAQ Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Push the
ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
MODE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Video Entertainment Sys-
tem (VES)™ (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a radio
text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
only).
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the Rewind/Fast Forward button causes the
tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of
the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or
Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary TUNE control clockwise to
increase or counter-clockwise to decrease the channel
number.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and “BASS” will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and “MID”
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and
“TREBLE” will display. Turn the TUNE control to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and “BAL-
ANCE” will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right
or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and “FADE”
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RND/PTY Button (Program Type Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or
turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
16 Digit-Character
Display
No program type or
undefined
None
Adult Hits Adult_Hits
Alert Alert Alert Alert
Classical Classical
Classic Rock Classic_Rock
College College
Program Type
16 Digit-Character
Display
Country Country
Emergency Test Emergency Test
Foreign Language Foreign_Language
Information Information
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Oldies Oldies
Personality Personality
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
Religious Music Religious_Music
Religious Talk Religious_Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Program Type
16 Digit-Character
Display
Soft Rock Soft_Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top_40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/DIR but-
ton. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/DIR button twice and “SET 2” will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,
12 FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored
into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
Note: This radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3
tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and
MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
SEEK Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
“PLEASE WAIT” and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
The radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the
disc is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD/ EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal. The
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJECT button for 5 seconds
and all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted
within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be dis-
played.
On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and
ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD Mode
for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Buttons1-6(CDModeforCDAudio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
MPEG
Specification
Sampling
Frequency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224, 192,
160, 128, 112, 96,
80, 64, 56, 48, 40,
32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144, 112,
96, 80, 64, 56, 48,
40, 32, 24, 16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
“PLEASE WAIT” and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
The radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the
disc is loading.
LOAD/ EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal. The
radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
priority mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Buttons1-6(CDModeforMP3Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to uconnect威 phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 studios
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to the uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio) section of
the Owner’s Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE-DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL uconnect姞 studios
(SATELLITE RADIO) AND uconnect姞 phone
CAPABILITY
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
REF Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Push the
ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360–
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is OFF and the
ignition is ON.
MODE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. “MUTE” will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
or turning the ignition ON/OFF, will cancel the MUTE
feature.
NOTE: In Hands-Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at
each listenable station before continuing to the next. To
stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display
for five seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/AUDIO con-
trol.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the TUNE/AUDIO
control to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to
blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the TUNE/AUDIO control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the Rewind/Fast Forward button causes the
tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of
the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or
Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the rotary TUNE control clockwise to increase or
counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control, and “BASS” will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and “MID”
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid-Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and “TREB”
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and “BAL”
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and “FADE”
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the TUNE control again or wait five seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To Set The
Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the SET button twice and “SET 2” will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,
12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored
into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Preset Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory, 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations.
Operating Instructions - CD Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
•
On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
•
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
player.
•
This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first
10 seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning the ignition
OFF/ON will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for five seconds.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Rewind) button works in a similar manner.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
play.
Operating Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard
3.5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and
releases the MODE button until “AUX” appears on the
display.
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK posi-
tion to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning the ignition
OFF/ON will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
MODE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions - uconnect姞 phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the “uconnect威 phone” section of this Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - uconnect姞 studios
(Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to the “uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio)” section
of this Owner’s Manual.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
uconnect姞 studios (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-
dian residents. Please have the following information
available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD EJECT and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press
the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
has passed since any button was pushed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
ESN/SID Access With RAQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
Selecting uconnect姞 studios (Satellite) Mode in
REF, and RAQ, Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information such as song
title and artist, press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and hold SEEK to bypass stations or use the TUNE
knob to search for the next channel. Press the top of the
button to search up and the bottom of the button to
search down. Holding the TUNE button causes the radio
to bypass channels until the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play
7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the
next channel of the selected program type. Press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE: Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button while
performing a music-type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music-type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna. The luggage rack (if
equipped), should also not be positioned directly above
the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Climate Control Operation
The Climate Control system allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located in the
center instrument panel, below the radio.
Climate Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
NOTE: The air conditioning system of your vehicle
contains R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the
ozone layer in the upper atmosphere.
The controls are as follows:
Fan Control
Use the Fan control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select.
The fan speed increases as you
move the control to the right from
the off position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the fan control is left in the “O” (off) position.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
The Mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution. You can select either
a primary mode, as identified by
the symbols, or a blend of two of
these modes. The closer the con-
trol is to a particular mode, the
more air distribution you receive
from that mode
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
window demist outlets with a small amount
through the defrost outlet.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if
the A/C button has not been pressed and the indicator
lamp is off. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the
windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes
only when necessary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
CAUTION!
If the Defroster is not working the windshield and
windows may become fogged, and your visibility
will be greatly diminished. See your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen-
gers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so
that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear
passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward
the left rear passenger.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the
temperature of the air inside the
passenger compartment. The blue
area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures while the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning (A/C) — If Equipped
Press the A/C button to engage
the air conditioning. A lamp will
illuminate when the air condition-
ing system is engaged
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
MAX A/C
To quickly cool the vehicle interior
follow the steps listed below:
1. Set the Temperature Control to Max Cool.
2. Set the Mode Control to Panel or Bi-Level.
3. Press the Recirculation button and the A/C button.
4. Adjust the Fan Control to desired airflow setting.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
NOTE:
•
Recirculation Mode will not operate in Floor, Mix or
Defrost modes.
•
See “Circulation Control” in this section, for proper or
extended use of this position.
Circulation Control
Rotate this control to choose be-
tween outside air intake or recir-
culation of the air inside the ve-
hicle. A lamp will illuminate when
you are in Recirculation mode.
Only use the Recirculation mode
to temporarily block out any out-
side odors, smoke, or dust and to
cool the interior rapidly upon ini-
tial startup in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE: Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of
moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For defogging, select
the Outside Air position.
NOTE: Recirculation mode will not operate in Floor,
Mix or Defrost modes.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
Operating Tips
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Window Fogging
Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the
A/C, Panel and Blower controls. Direct the panel outlets
toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate without
A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by using the defrost position.
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window
surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect-
ing on the inside surface of the glass.
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recirculate
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, use the Outside Air position.
Summer Operation
Vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze
coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to
raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against
overheating. A 50% concentration is recommended.
Outside Air Intake
When operating the system, make sure the air intake,
directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush,
snow or other obstructions such as leaves. Leaves col-
lected in the air-intake plenum may reduce airflow and
plug the plenum water drains.
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of
vehicle operation.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
Floor, Mix, or Defrost mode. The air is directed at the area
of the windows through which you view the outside
mirrors.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .................... 224
▫ Manual Transaxle — If Equipped ......... 224
▫ Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped ....... 224
▫ Normal Starting ..................... 224
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) ............... 225
▫ If The Engine Fails To Start ............. 225
▫ After Starting ....................... 226
▫ Turbocharger ⬙Cool-Down⬙ ............. 226
䡵 Manual Transaxle — If Equipped .......... 226
▫ Five–Speed Manual Transaxle ........... 226
䡵 Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped ........ 229
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System ...... 230
▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transaxle ......... 231
▫ Gear Ranges ........................ 232
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped ............... 234
▫ Operation ......................... 235
▫ General Information .................. 235
5
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 236
▫ Acceleration ........................ 236
▫ Traction ........................... 237
䡵 Driving Through Water ................. 237
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................. 238
▫ Shallow Standing Water ............... 238
䡵 Power Steering ....................... 240
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 241
䡵 Parking Brake ........................ 241
䡵 Brake System ........................ 243
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) —
If Equipped ........................ 244
䡵 Traction Control System — If Equipped ...... 246
䡵 Tire Safety Information ................. 248
▫ Tire Markings ....................... 248
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 251
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 252
䡵 Tires — General Information ............. 256
▫ Tire Pressure ....................... 256
䡵 Tire Chains .......................... 263
䡵 Snow Tires .......................... 264
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 264
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..... 265
▫ Base System ........................ 267
䡵 Fuel Requirements ..................... 270
▫ 2.4L And 2.4L Turbo Engines ............ 270
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Adding Fuel ......................... 274
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............. 274
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 276
䡵 Vehicle Loading ...................... 276
▫ Vehicle Certification Label .............. 276
䡵 Trailer Towing ........................ 278
▫ Common Towing Definitions ............ 278
▫ Towing Tips ........................ 288
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 290
▫ Towing — Manual Transaxle ............ 290
▫ Towing — Automatic Transaxle .......... 290
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transaxle — If Equipped
Before starting the engine, fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift lever
into NEUTRAL.
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor.
Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
and press the shift lever knob button before shifting to
any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine has not
started within three seconds, slightly press the accelera-
tor pedal while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure above.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so follow the procedure carefully. Refer to
Section 6 of this manual for jump-starting instruc-
tions.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If The Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This
should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the ON position, release the
accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting” pro-
cedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
Turbocharger ⴖCool-Downⴖ
NOTE: Letting the engine idle after severe operation
allows the turbine housing to cool to normal operating
temperature. Do not increase the idle speed manually.
The following chart should be used as a guide in deter-
mining the amount of engine idle time required to
sufficiently cool down the turbocharger before shut-
down, depending upon the type of driving and the
amount of cargo.
TURBOCHARGER ⴖCOOL-DOWNⴖ CHART
Driving Conditions Idle Before Shutdown
Normal 0 min
Aggressive/Heavy Load 3 min
Trailer Tow 5 min
MANUAL TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED
Five–Speed Manual Transaxle
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
Use each gear in numerical order - do not skip a gear. Be
sure the shift lever is in first gear, (not third gear), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in third gear.
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never move the shift lever into REVERSE until the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transaxle lubri-
cant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
Shift Pattern
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy,
it should be upshifted as listed in Table 1.
Table 1 - Manual Transaxle Normal Acceleration and
Cruise Shift Speeds in MPH (km/h)
Engine Mode 1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5
2.4L
Non-
Turbo
Accel-
eration
15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (65) 45 (72)
Cruise 15 (24) 25 (40) 42 (68) 45 (72)
For improved performance, your manual transaxle may
be upshifted up to the maximum speeds listed in Table 2
(within legal speed limits).
Table 2 - Manual Transaxle Maximum Performance
Shift Speeds in MPH (km/h)
Engine 1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5
2.4L
Non-
Turbo
30 (48) 60 (97) 85 (136) 115 (185)
If you exceed these speeds, you may notice the engine cut
in and out. This is caused by an electronic limiter in the
engine computer. The engine will run normally when
you reduce engine speed.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of an engine speed, you could damage the
engine, transmission, or clutch.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first gear when descending a steep
grade.
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be
overburdened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only move the shift lever
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
You must step on the brake pedal and press the shift lever
knob button before you will be able to shift out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must step on the brake pedal and press the
shift lever knob button before you will be able to move
the shift lever out of PARK.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position. Always step on the
brake pedal and press the shift lever knob button
before shifting out of PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will function
normally, except you may be able to shift the vehicle from
PARK, without pressing the brake pedal. If this occurs
obtain service from an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift lever knob
pushbutton is out. It also prevents moving the shift lever
out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON position,
and the brake pedal is pressed.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Four-Speed Automatic Transaxle
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
The electronically-controlled transaxle provides a precise
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
RESET Mode
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transaxle shifts automatically into second
gear. The transaxle remains in second gear despite the
forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL
will continue to operate. This second gear limp-in feature
allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for
service without damaging the transaxle.
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears:
1. Stop the vehicle and move the shift lever into PARK.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF then restart the engine.
3. Move the shift lever into DRIVE and resume driving.
4. If the transaxle cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-
mended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, and then move the
shift lever into the PARK position.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the key from the
ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key
is removed from the ignition, the shift lever is locked
in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never
leave unattended children inside a vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
•
When moving the shift lever into PARK, press the
button on the shift lever knob and firmly move the
lever all the way forward until it stops.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
ensure it is in the PARK position.
•
When engaged in PARK, you will not be able to move
the shift lever rearward without pressing the lever
knob button.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
turn the ignition from LOCK to ON, so the steering
wheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise, dam-
age to the steering column or shift lever could result.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE/OVERDRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and best fuel economy.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
When frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the
DRIVE/OVERDRIVE range, such as when operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing trail-
ers), use third gear.
DRIVE — 3rd
This range eliminates shifts into OVERDRIVE. The trans-
axle will operate normally in first and second gear while
in this range.
NOTE: Using third gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance, fuel economy, and extend transaxle life by reduc-
ing excessive shifting and heat build up.
Use third gear when descending steep grades to prevent
brake system distress.
LOW — 1st
This range should be used for maximum engine braking
when descending steep grades. In this range, up shifts
will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down
shifts from second to first gear will occur as early as
possible.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transaxle that offers
manual gear-shifting capability to provide you with more
control. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine brak-
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
The Autostick威 position is just below the OVERDRIVE
position and is identified by the word “Autostick”. When
you move the shift lever into the Autostick威 position, it
can be moved from side to side. Moving the lever to the
left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift.
The gear position will be shown in the gear display,
located in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
•
In Autostick威 mode, the transaxle will only shift up
and down when the driver manually moves the shift
lever right (D+) or left (D-).
•
An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of the in-
strument cluster. This message appears in order to alert
the driver to upshift to the next gear. The UPSHIFT
message will display while operating the vehicle at
higher engine revolutions per minute (RPM).
You can move the shift lever in or out of the Autostick威
mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal. If you choose the OVERDRIVE mode,
the transaxle will operate automatically; shifting between
the four available gears. When you wish to engage
Autostick威, simply move the shift lever to the Autostick威
position. The transaxle will remain in the current gear
until an upshift or downshift is chosen.
Move the shift lever back to the OVERDRIVE position to
shift out of the Autostick威 mode.
General Information
•
You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). The system will ignore
attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
•
The transaxle will automatically downshift to 1st gear
when coming to a stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
•
The transaxle will automatically upshift from first to
second gear and from second to third gear when
engine speed reaches about 6,300 RPM.
•
Downshifts from third to second gear above 74 mph
(119 km/h) and from second to first gear above
41 mph (66 km/h) will be ignored.
•
Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
•
While in the Autostick威 mode, the Electronic Speed
Control will only function in third or fourth gear.
Downshifting out of third gear will turn off the speed
control.
•
Transaxle shifting will be more noticeable when
Autostick威 is engaged.
•
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
•
If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
Autostick威 mode and the transaxle will return to the
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of con-
tamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water.
Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
appears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition on,
the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will
come on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The chime
will sound up to 10 times, or until the vehicle has
returned to a stop.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
the lever. Always move the shift lever into the PARK
position (automatic transaxle) or into the REVERSE po-
sition (manual transaxle). To release the parking brake,
apply the brake pedal, pull up slightly on the lever, then
press the button on the end of the lever and push the
lever fully down toward the floor.
NOTE: The parking brake lever will not release unless
the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever into PARK, otherwise
the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.
Parking Brake
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
Always apply the parking brake before leaving the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power-assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power-assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How-
ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system oper-
ating.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the “Brake Warning
Light” will illuminate.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. A significant decrease in braking performance or
vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
•
Pumping of the ABS will diminish their effective-
ness and may lead to an accident. Pumping makes
the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on
your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
•
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
(Continued)
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
The ABS Telltale Light monitors the Anti-Lock
Brake System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is
not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the “Brake Warning Light” is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Light”
remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Systems are not function-
ing properly. Immediate repair to the ABS system at an
authorized dealer is required.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
A clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
Brake pedal pulsations,
•
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly-installed or high-output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
dealership professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Traction Control System (TCS) will improve accel-
eration and steering on slippery surfaces by reducing tire
spin. The system reduces wheel slip and maintains
traction at the driving (front) wheels by engaging the
brake on the wheel that is losing traction. When this
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
occurs the “TCS Indicator Light” located above the
instrument cluster odometer will flash. The system oper-
ates at speeds below 35 mph (56 km/h).
A pushbutton at the center of the instrument panel,
below the radio, turns the Traction Control System ON or
OFF.
The system is always in the “ON” mode unless:
•
The TCS OFF switch has been used to turn the system
off;
•
There is a Anti-Lock Brake System malfunction;
•
There is a Traction Control System malfunction;
•
The system has been automatically deactivated to
prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated
brake temperatures.
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the “TCS
Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster.
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is
a normal condition. The system will remain disabled for
about four minutes until the brakes have cooled. The
system will automatically reactivate and turn off the
“TCS Indicator Light.”
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow, turn
the Traction Control System off before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle free.
TCS OFF Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: Safety,
Economy, and Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability.
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as
inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High-Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High-speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
WARNING!
Temporary-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary-use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings that apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
For additional information, refer to “Freeing A Stuck
Vehicle” in Section 6.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is shown in the following
diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn you of a low tire pressure based on
the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in this section for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
TPMS will warn you of a low tire pressure if the tire
pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natu-
ral pressure loss through the tire.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
TPMS will continue to warn you of low tire pressure as
long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the
tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold
placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has
been illuminated, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The
system will automatically update and the TPMS Telltale
Light will turn off once the system receives the updated
tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPMS
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
TPMS Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPMS Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
•
TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
•
TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Telltale Light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to perform a
monthly tire pressure check on, and to maintain the
proper pressure of all the tires on your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the TPMS Telltale Light
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
The TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec-
onds and then remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provid-
ing the system fault still exists. The TPMS Telltale Light
will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies (RF)
as the TPMS sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Excessive accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS Sensors.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS Sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn ON due to
the low tire.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS
Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the
following licenses:
United States ..................... KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L And 2.4L Turbo Engines
2.4L standard engines are designed to meet
all emission regulations and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “regular”
gasolines having an octane rating of 87.
The use of premium gasoline is not recom-
mended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium
gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality
unleaded “regular” gasolines, and in some circumstances
may result in poorer performance.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85
Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol,
it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer if that gasoline
contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s per-
formance:
CAUTION!
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance, damage the emission control system.
(Continued)
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your dealer for service assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2 in
(50 mm) inside the opening. If using a portable container,
it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to force open
the restricting door.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the passen-
ger’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement.
NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
Gas Cap Tether Hook
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
•
A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and doing so will cause the malfunction
indicator light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) in the
instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tight-
ened each time the vehicle is refueled.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will be displayed in the Odometer/
Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Description” in Section 4 of this manual.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
odometer/trip odometer reset button to turn the message
off. If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a
damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row,
the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem
will turn the MIL light off. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System — OBDII” in Section 7 of this manual for more
information.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
all loading conditions.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension compo-
nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes
operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes an 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The trailer tongue weight is the downward force exerted
on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not
be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You
must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s direc-
tions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing
towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and cross-
winds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight-
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for
heavier tongue weights (TW) and may be required de-
pending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration/loading to
comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR require-
ments.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in an accident.
Weight-Distributing Systems may not be compatible with
surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer
manufacturer or a reputable recreational vehicle dealer
for additional information.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer
service center for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS
Class
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Towing Weights
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
1
2.4L NA and 2.4L Turbo/Automatic* 20 sq ft (1.9 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 110 lbs (50 kg)
2.4L NA and 2.4L Turbo/Manual* 20 sq ft (1.9 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 110 lbs (50 kg)
* NA (Naturally Aspirated)
1
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to the following
“Tire–Safety Information” section in this manual.
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side,
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km)
of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your
vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
•
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
PARK. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. TW (Trailer Tongue Weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized. This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of trailer tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements — Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires-General Information in this section for proper
tire inflation procedures.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires-General Infor-
mation” in this section for the proper inspection
procedure.
•
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires-General Informa-
tion” in this section for proper tire replacement proce-
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for ad-
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four–or seven-pin
connector wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pin
connector illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transaxle
The OVERDRIVE/DRIVE gear range can be selected
when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while
in this range, third gear should be selected.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Using the third gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the “Main-
tenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
•
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
•
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed.
•
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
•
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing — Manual Transaxle
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it
may be towed with all four wheels on the ground, in a
forward direction, at any legal highway speed, for any
distance, if the transaxle is in NEUTRAL.
Towing — Automatic Transaxle
CAUTION!
Recreational towing on vehicle’s equipped with a
automatic transaxle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers ................ 292
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats ................ 292
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 294
▫ Jack Location ....................... 294
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ................... 295
▫ Spare Tire Removal ................... 295
▫ Preparations For Jacking ............... 296
▫ Jacking Instructions ................... 296
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures ................ 300
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 302
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 303
▫ Towing With The Key-In-Ignition ......... 303
▫ Towing Without The Key-In-Ignition ....... 304
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn
off the Hazard Warning flasher.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — Slow down.
•
In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Hazard Warning Switch
292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the pointer of the Coolant Tempera-
ture Gage rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and
stop the vehicle. Turn off the air conditioning and
wait until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for
more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the Temperature Control to maxi-
mum heat, the Mode Control to floor and the Fan
Control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed behind the right rear
side trim panel in the cargo area.
Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack.
Jack Storage
294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear of the
vehicle by means of a hook/basket mechanism. To re-
move or stow the compact spare, use the jack handle to
rotate the “spare tire drive” nut. The nut is located under
the rear scuff plate at the right rear of the cargo area, just
inside the liftgate opening.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the cover and fit the jack-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until you can remove the
swivel hook from the stowage basket. Swing the basket
down to remove the compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
The hook is designed for use with the jack handle
only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.
Spare Tire Storage
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transaxle) or
REVERSE (manual transaxle).
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly, and shift a automatic
transmission into PARK; a manual transmission
into REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
stowage bag.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297
NOTE: If equipped with a center cap that covers the
wheel nuts, pry off the cap using the small end of the lug
wrench. To reinstall the cap, make sure it is properly
lined up before pushing it onto the wheel.
Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on the
cross-member below the radiator, on the front sus-
pension cross-member, or on the rear axle assembly.
2. There are two jacking locations on each side of the
body, one at the front of the vehicle and one in the rear on
the trailing arm bracket under the triangular cut out
symbol. Turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed.
Jacking Locations
1 — Front Jacking Location
2 — Rear Jacking Location
298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
3. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
4. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers where applicable off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling original wheel, properly
align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel
cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
5. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
6. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut
torque is 100 ft lbs (135 N m). If you doubt that you have
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a qualified
service station.
7. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Stow the lug wrench, and jack in their designated
location. Secure all parts using the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
8. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
9. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. The correct
pressure as required.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly, so
follow this procedure carefully.
300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place auto-
matic transaxle in PARK (manual transaxle in NEU-
TRAL) and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis-
charged battery.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or cloth-
ing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the contami-
nated area immediately with large quantities of
water.
•
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery
or any other booster source with an output that
exceeds 12-Volts.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of
the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good
contact.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301
6. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key威 Immobi-
lizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three
seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
position.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the se-
quence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol, turn the system OFF before attempting to “rock” the
vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back-and-forth between RE-
VERSE and DRIVE (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
and 1st gear (manual transaxle). Using, the least accel-
erator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels is most effective.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck. And do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing With The Key-In-Ignition
Four-Speed Automatic Transaxle
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions: The steering column must be unlocked and the
shift lever must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be
towed must not exceed 100 miles (160 km), and the
towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/h). If the
transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed
more than 100 miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed
with the front wheels off the ground to avoid damage to
the transaxle.
Manual Transaxle
Your vehicle may be towed in a forward direction, with
all four wheels on the ground, and the shift lever in the
NEUTRAL position. If the transaxle is not operative, the
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels off the
ground.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303
All Transaxles
CAUTION!
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC position, not in
the LOCK position.
Do not attempt to use sling-type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach it to front or rear suspension compo-
nents. Damage to your vehicle may result from
improper towing.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans-
axle remains in NEUTRAL.
Towing Without The Key-In-Ignition
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle.
Towing Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing with
all four wheels on the ground)
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it
may be towed in a forward direction, at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the transaxle is in
NEUTRAL.
If the ignition key is not available, vehicles with auto-
matic transaxles can not be flat towed at any time.
304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L ............. 307
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L Turbo ........ 308
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ...... 309
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 309
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 309
䡵 Replacement Parts ..................... 311
䡵 Dealer Service ........................ 311
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................. 312
▫ Engine Oil ......................... 312
▫ Engine Oil Filter ..................... 316
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 316
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 317
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 318
▫ Body Lubrication .................... 319
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 320
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ................. 320
7
▫ Exhaust System ..................... 321
▫ Cooling System ..................... 323
▫ Brake System ....................... 329
▫ Automatic Transaxle .................. 331
▫ Manual Transaxle .................... 334
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 334
䡵 Fuses .............................. 340
▫ Integrated Power Module (IPM) .......... 340
䡵 Vehicle Storage ....................... 344
䡵 Replacement Bulbs .................... 344
䡵 Bulb Replacement ..................... 345
▫ Headlights ......................... 345
▫ Front Parking, Turn Signal, And Side Marker
Lights ............................ 346
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......... 347
▫ Tail/Stop Lights And Rear
Turn Signal Lights .................... 347
▫ Backup Lights ...................... 348
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . 348
䡵 Fluids And Capacities .................. 349
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ....... 350
▫ Engine ............................ 350
▫ Chassis ........................... 351
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 — Battery
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Automatic Transaxle Dipstick
3 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Engine Oil Fill
5 — Power Distribution Center 11 — Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L TURBO
1 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Battery
2 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Air Cleaner Filter
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). OBD
II will also store diagnostic codes and other information
to assist an authorized service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap
until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that
the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer
reset button to turn the message off. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
CAUTION!
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transaxle, power steering or air conditioning. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component
malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the
flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling the crankcase as indicated by an oil level
above the “MAX” mark on the engine oil dipstick
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to decide if any apply to you.
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
•
Trailer towing.
•
Taxi, Police, or delivery service (commercial service).
•
Off-road or desert operation.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you, then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months,
whichever comes first, and follow “Maintenance Sched-
ule B — All Engines”in Section 8 of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Non-Turbocharged Engine then change
your engine oil at every interval shown on “Maintenance
Schedule A — Non Turbo”in Section 8 of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Turbocharged Engine then change your
engine oil at every interval shown on “Maintenance
Schedule A — Turbo”in Section 8 of this manual.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L and 2.4L
Turbo Engines
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber, should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils, provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where they can be safely discarded in your area.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This engine has a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use
a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high-quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high-quality oil filters and
are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the filter at the
intervals shown on “Maintenance Schedule A”. If, how-
ever, you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or
severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected
periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals
shown on “Maintenance Schedule B”.
NOTE: For vehicles with a Turbo engine, a small
amount of oil accumulation in the air cleaner box is
normal. The amount will depend on driving style. The air
cleaner box should be cleaned out and a new make-up air
filter element should be installed during the normal air
filter maintenance procedure.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high-quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high-quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion. Apply grease
to posts and clamps after tightening.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage as
battery damage can result.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium-based grease such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-
tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high-quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner, or use the washer solvent.
This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road
film and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. To avoid dam-
aging the blades, make sure that they are not frozen to the
glass before turning them on. Keep the blade rubber out
of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
Adding Washer Fluid
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the passenger side and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have a competent technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Section 2 ”Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle,” “Safety Tips”, Exhaust Gas”, of this
manual.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emissions control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for a prolonged period.
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the
intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedules” in Sec-
tion 8 of this manual.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F
(⫺37°C) are anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing,
according to the temperatures occurring in the area
where the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by hu-
mans and animals, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
CAUTION!
If ethylene glycol engine coolant (antifreeze) is in-
gested by anyone, contact a physician immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating tempera-
ture, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) per-
formance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the Brake System Warning Telltale Light indicates
system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser-
voir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transaxle, the Brake Fluid Reservoir supplies fluid to both
the Brake System and the Clutch Release System. The
two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in
one system will not affect the other system. The manual
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
transaxle Clutch Release System should not require fluid
replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the Brake
Fluid Reservoir is low, and the brake system does not
indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a result of
a leak in the Hydraulic Clutch Release System. See your
local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”, found
later in this section, for the correct fluid type.
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than the recommended MOPAR威 DOT 3 prod-
uct, or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS
specification, may result in sudden brake failure
during hard, prolonged braking. You could have an
accident.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle.
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid; all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign mat-
ter.
Automatic Transaxle
The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transaxle and the fluid.
Fluid Level Check
Use the following procedure to check the automatic
transaxle fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of
60 seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear posi-
tion, ending with the shift lever in PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate
the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82° C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
temperature below 80°F (27°C).
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
remove dipstick and note the reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
overfill.
CAUTION!
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
•
Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious
damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering
the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid,
make certain that the dipstick cap is re-seated
properly.
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid and Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed as follows:
Maintenance Schedule A — Non Turbocharged Engines
— No change necessary.
Maintenance Schedule A — Turbocharged Engines —
No change necessary.
Maintenance Schedule B — All Engines — Every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) change fluid and filter under
the following conditions:
•
Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transaxle. The only exception to this policy is
the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In
addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transaxle as the
chemicals can damage your transaxle components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
Manual Transaxle
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
this section for the correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more that 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
following conditions exist:
•
The lubricant has become contaminated with water. If
contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed
immediately.
•
If severe usage has occurred, refer to “Maintenance
Schedule B” in Section 8 of this manual.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation,
•
Stone and gravel impact,
•
Insects, tree sap and tar,
•
Salt in the air near sea coast localities, and
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use MOPAR威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains, and to protect your paint finish. Take care never
to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch-Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent, or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any solvents or protectants on Stain Repel
products.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean, then
MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary.
Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use MOPAR威
Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery,
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive-type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters, or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
FUSES
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses.
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
1 EMPTY
2 20 Amp
Yellow
AWD ECU
Feed — If
Equipped
Integrated Power Module
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
3 10 Amp Red CHMSL
Brake
Switch Feed
4 10 Amp Red Ignition
Switch Feed
5 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow
6 10 Amp Red IOD Sw/
Pwr Mir/
Ocm
Steering
Cntrl Sdar/
Hfm
7 30 Amp
Green
IOD Sense1
8 30 Amp
Green
IOD Sense2
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
9 40 Amp
Green
Power Seats
10 20 Amp
Yellow
CCN Feed,
Power
Locks
11 15 Amp Lt
Blue
Power
Outlet
12 20 Amp
Yellow
Ign Run/
Acc Inverter
13 20 Amp
Yellow
Pwr Run/
Acc Outlet
RR
14 10 Amp Red IOD CCN/
Interior
Lighting
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
15 50 Amp Red RAD Fan
Relay
Battery Feed
16 15 Amp Lt.
Blue
IGN Run/
Acc Cigar
Ltr/Sunroof
17 10 Amp Red IOD Feed
CVT Mod/
Mod_Wcm
18 40 Amp
Green
ASD Relay
Contact
Feed
19 20 Amp
Yellow
PWR Amp
1 & Amp 2
Feed
20 15 Amp Lt.
Blue
IOD Feed
Radio
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
21 10 Amp Red IOD Feed
Intrus
Mod/Siren
22 10 Amp Red IGN RUN
Hvac/
Compass
Sensor
23 15 Amp Lt.
Blue
ENG ASD
Relay Feed
3
24 25 Amp
Natural
PWR
Sunroof
Feed
25 10 Amp Red Heated
Mirror
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
26 15 Amp Lt.
Blue
ENG ASD
Relay Feed
2
27 10 Amp Red IGN RUN
Only ORC
Feed
28 10 Amp Red IGN RUN
ORC/OCM
Feed
29 EMPTY
30 20 Amp
Yellow
Heated
Seats
31 10 Amp Red Headlamp
Washer
Relay
Control
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
32 30 Amp
Pink
ENG ASD
Control
Feed 1
33 10 Amp Red ABS MOD/
J1962
Conn/PCM
34 30 Amp
Pink
ABS Valve
Feed
35 40 Amp
Green
ABS Pump
Feed
36 30 Amp
Pink
Headlamp
Washer
Relay
Contact
Feed
37 25 Amp
Natural
Spare
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
•
Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
•
Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb No.
Center Console Floor Lamp ................. T37
Climate Controls......................6233137
Console Gear Selector ...................PC194
Dome Light (Sedan)...................... T579
Instrument Cluster Illumination ...............74
Overhead Reading Light (Overhead Console) . . . T1037
Overhead Reading Light (Rearview Mirror) .....T192
Rear Cargo ............................T906
Visor Vanity .........................6501966
All the interior bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS BULBS — Exterior Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlight ................... 9006XS
High Beam Headlight...................9005XS
Front Park/Turn Signal/
Side Marker Light ................... 4157NAKX
Front Fog Light ......................... 9145
Center High-Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) (Sedan) ...................921–W16W
Rear Tail/Stop .......................... 3157
Rear Turn Signal .......................3757A
Backup Light..................... 3157-P27/7W
License Light ...........................168
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new headlight bulb with your
fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life.
1. Remove the headlight access cover splash shield,
located in the front wheel well opening.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
2. Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
3. Rotate the socket to the left one-quarter turn, and
replace the bulb.
Front Parking, Turn Signal, and Side Marker
Lights
1. Remove the headlight access cover splash shield,
located in the front wheel well opening.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate the socket to the left one-quarter turn, and
replace the bulb.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
1. Remove the fasteners attaching the lower splash
shield to gain access to the fog light.
2. Twist and remove the bulb from the fog light housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.
Tail/Stop Lights and Rear Turn Signal Lights
1. Remove the screw attaching the tail light housing and
remove the housing from the vehicle.
2. Twist the bulb socket one—quarter turn to remove it
from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
Backup Lights
1. To remove the backup lamp, you must take a fiber
stick and slide it along the inboard side of the lamp and
compress a spring clip to allow it to partially ⬙pop⬙ out to
the secondary catch.
2. Fully compress the clip to get the lamp to come out
completely.
3. Remove the socket from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
1. Open the liftgate and remove the liftgate CHMSL
cover.
2. Remove CHMSL lens from the housing by unlatching
the two side latches.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 15 Gallons 56.7 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4 Liter/2.4L Turbo Engines (SAE 5W-30, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
Cooling System *
2.4 Liter/2.4L Turbo Engines (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine
Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
6.5 Quarts 6.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs (2.4L Engine) Champion威 RE16MC (Gap 0.040 in [1.02 mm])
Spark Plugs (2.4L Turbo Engine) Champion威 RE14MCC5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Brake Master Cylinder/Manual
Transmission Clutch System
MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only rec-
ommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance ...... 354
䡵 Maintenance Schedules ................. 354
▫ At Each Stop For Fuel ................. 356
▫ Once a Month ...................... 356
▫ At Each Oil Change .................. 356
▫ Maintenance Schedule B — All Engines .... 357
▫ Maintenance Schedule A — Non-
Turbocharged ....................... 368
▫ Maintenance Schedule A — Turbocharged . . . 373
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are three maintenance schedules that show re-
quired service for your vehicle.
First is “Maintenance Schedule B — All Engines.” It is for
vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are
listed below and at the beginning of the schedule.
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32°F(0°C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50 percent of your driving is at sustained
high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F(32°C).
•
Trailer towing.†〫
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
354 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-
vice).†〫
•
Off-road or desert operation.
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel.
NOTE:
•
If ANY of these apply to you, then change your engine
oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months,
whichever comes first, and follow “Maintenance
Schedule B — All Engines” in this section.
•
If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and replace
the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or
60 months, whichever comes first, and follow “Main-
tenance Schedule B — All Engines” in this section.
•
Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed
for “Maintenance Schedule B — All Engines.”
Second is “Maintenance Schedule A — Non-
Turbocharged.” It is for vehicles that are not operated
under any of the conditions listed under “Maintenance
Schedule B — All Engines.”
Third is Maintenance Schedule A — Turbocharged. It is
for vehicles that are not operated under any of the
conditions listed under “Maintenance Schedule B — All
Engines.”
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 355
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and transaxle, and add as needed.
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
•
Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
proper fit.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the exhaust system.
•
Inspect the brake hoses.
•
Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo-
nents.
•
Check the automatic transaxle fluid level.
•
Check the manual transaxle fluid level and fill plug
condition.
•
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
356 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Schedule B — All Engines
Follow “Maintenance Schedule B — All Engines”, if you
usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the
following conditions.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
60,000 miles (100 000 km) if the vehicle is usually
operated under one or more of the conditions marked
with an 〫.
Change the manual transaxle fluid every 48,000 miles
(80 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under one
or more of the conditions marked with an †.
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
•
Trailer towing.†〫
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-
vice).†〫
•
Off-road or desert operation.
•
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol) fuel.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 357
NOTE:
•
If ANY of these apply to you, then change your engine
oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months,
whichever comes first, and follow ’Maintenance
Schedule B — All Engines”in this section.
•
If ANY of these apply to you, then flush and replace
the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or
60 months, whichever comes first, and follow “Main-
tenance Schedule B — All Engines” in this section.
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Non–Turbocharged engine, then change
your engine oil at every interval shown on “Maintenance
Schedule A — Non–Turbocharged” in this section.
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Turbocharged engine change your en-
gine oil at every interval shown on “Maintenance Sched-
ule A — Turbocharged” in this section.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
358 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000 18,000
(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000) (30 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX X
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary. *
X
Inspect the make-up air filter, replace as
necessary.*
X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 359
Miles 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000 33,000 36,000
(Kilometers) (35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000) (55 000) (60 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX X
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
360 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 39,000 42,000 45,000 48,000 51,000 54,000
(Kilometers) (65 000) (70 000) (75 000) (80 000) (85 000) (90 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX X
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Change the brake fluid. If vehicle is used for
trailer towing.
X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary.*
X
Change the manual transaxle fluid.† X
Inspect the make-up air filter, replace as
necessary.*
X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 361
Miles 57,000 60,000 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000
(Kilometers) (95 000) (100 000) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX X
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seal. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
Change the automatic transaxle fluid and
filter.〫
X
Flush and replace engine coolant at
60 months, if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
362 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 75,000 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000
(Kilometers) (125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX X
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary.*
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if
necessary.*
X
Inspect the make-up air filter, replace as
necessary.*
X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 363
Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 102,000 105,000
(Kilometers) (155 000) (160 000) (165 000) (170 000) (175 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX
Rotate tires. X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Change the brake fluid if your vehicle is used for
trailer towing.
X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace as
necessary.*
X
Change the manual transaxle fluid.† X
Replace the engine timing belt.* X
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not
replaced at 60 months.
X
Inspect the make-up air filter, replace as necessary.* X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with
four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Replace the generator belt. X
Replace the power steering/air conditioning belt. X
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter.〫 X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
120 months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles
(200 000 km).
X
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365
Miles 123,000 126,000 129,000 132,000 135,000
(Kilometers) (205 000) (210 000) (215 000) (220 000) (225 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace as
necessary.*
X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
366 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 138,000 141,000 144,000 147,000 150,000
(Kilometers) (230 000) (235 000) (240 000) (245 000) (250 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at three months.
XXXXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with
four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Adjust the generator belt tension. X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Change the manual transaxle fluid.† X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
† This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
limousine-type operation, or trailer towing.
〫 This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
limousine-type operation, or trailer towing.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all
receipts.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 367
Maintenance Schedule A — Non-Turbocharged
Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000
(Kilometers) (10 000) (20 000) (30 000) (40 000) (50 000) (60 000)
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] [36]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X XXXXX
Rotate tires. X XXXXX
Inspect the brake linings. X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
368 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 42,000 48,000 54,000 60,000 66,000
(Kilometers) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000)
[Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with
four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months,
if not done at 102,000 miles (200 000 km)
X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 369
Miles 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000 102,000
(Kilometers) (120 000) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000) (170 000)
[Months] [72] [78] [84] [90] [96] [102]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Replace the engine timing belt.* X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Inspect the PCV valve, replace if necessary.* X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not
replaced at 60 months.
X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
370 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 108,000 114,000 120,000 126,000 132,000 138,000
(Kilometers) (180
000)
(190
000)
(200
000)
(210
000)
(220
000)
(230
000)
[Months] [108] [114] [120] [126] [132] [138]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. XXXXXX
Rotate tires. XXXXXX
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with
four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the generator belt. X
Replace power steering/air conditioning belt. X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months,
if not done at 102,000 miles (200 000 kg).
X
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 371
Miles 144,000 150,000
(Kilometers) (240 000) (250 000)
[Months] [144] [150]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X
Rotate tires. XX
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Adjust the generator belt tension. X
Replace the air cleaner filter.* X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all
receipts.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
372 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance Schedule A — Turbocharged
Miles 5,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000
(Kilometers) (8 000) (16 000) (24 000) (32 000) (40 000) (48 000)
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] [36]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X XXXXX
Rotate tires. X XXXXX
Inspect the brake linings. X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 373
Miles 35,000 40,000 45,000 50,000 55,000 60,000
(Kilometers) (56 000) (64 000) (72 000) (80 000) (88 000) (96 000)
[Months] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66] [72]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X XXXX
Rotate tires. X X XXXX
Inspect the brake linings. X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
Flush and replace engine coolant at
60 months, if not replaced at 100,000 miles
(160 000 km).
X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
374 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 65,000 70,000 75,000 80,000 85,000 90,000
(Kilometers) (104 000) (112 000) (120 000) (128 000) (136 000) (144 000)
[Months] [78] [84] [90] [96] [102] [108]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. XXXX X X
Rotate tires. XXXX X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Inspect the PCV valve, and replace if
necessary.*
X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 375
Miles 95,000 100,000 105,000 110,000 115,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (152 000) (160 000) (168 000) (176 000) (184 000) (192 000)
[Months] [114] [120] [126] [132] [138] [144]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables. X
Replace the generator belt. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Replace the power steering/air conditioner
belt.
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant if not
done at 60 months.
X
Replace the engine timing belt. X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
376 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles 125,000 130,000 135,000 140,000 145,000 150,000
(Kilometers) (200 000) (208 000) (216 000) (224 000) (232 000) (240 000)
[Months] [150] [156] [162] [168] [174] [180]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four-wheel disc brakes.
X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.* X
Replace the spark plugs. X
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals. X
Replace the make-up air filter.* X
Adjust the generator drive belt tension. X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all
receipts.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 377
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
378 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 381
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ........... 381
▫ Prepare A List ...................... 381
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 381
䡵 If You Need Assistance ................. 381
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center .......... 382
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 382
▫ In Mexico Contact .................... 382
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 383
▫ Service Contract ..................... 383
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .... 384
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ....................... 384
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ................ 384
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 384
▫ In Canada ......................... 385
䡵 Publication Order Forms ................ 385
9
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades ........................ 387
▫ Treadwear ......................... 387
▫ Traction Grades ..................... 387
▫ Temperature Grades .................. 388
380 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 381
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
382 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 383
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
384 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 385
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the in-
formation that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightfor-
ward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and main-
tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili-
ties and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
386 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 387
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
388 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .............. 244
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 325
Adding Fuel ........................... 274
Additives, Fuel .........................272
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 316
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............318
Air Conditioning Controls .................213
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............219
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 318,319
Air Conditioning System ................ 213,318
Air Pressure, Tires ....................... 257
Airbag ................................45
Airbag Deployment .......................56
Airbag Light ....................... 59,73,173
Airbag Maintenance ....................... 58
Airbag, Side ............................ 54
Alarm Light ...........................172
Alarm, Panic ............................23
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ............... 18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................211
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........ 324,325,349,350
Capacities ...........................349
Disposal ............................327
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............. 244
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................172
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........ 18
Appearance Care ........................ 334
Assistance Towing ........................96
Auto Down Power Windows ................32
Automatic Door Locks ..................... 29
Automatic Transaxle .............. 12,224,229,331
Adding Fluid .........................331
Filter ............................... 333
Fluid and Filter Changes ................. 333
Fluid Level Check .....................331
Interlock System ..................... 15,230
Reset Mode .......................... 231
390 INDEX
Special Additives ...................... 333
Autostick .............................234
Back-Up Lights ......................... 348
Battery ............................... 317
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ....... 26
Belts, Seat ..............................72
Body Mechanism Lubrication ............... 319
B-Pillar Location ........................ 252
Brake, Parking ..........................241
Brake System ........................ 243,329
Anti-Lock (ABS) .......................244
Fluid Check ..........................329
Master Cylinder .......................329
Parking .............................241
Warning Light ........................169
Brakes .............................243,329
Brake/Transmission Interlock ............... 230
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........70
Bulb Replacement .....................344,345
Bulbs, Light ..........................73,344
Calibration, Compass .................. 176,185
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........349
Capacities, Fluid ........................349
Caps, Filler
Fuel ...............................274
Oil (Engine) .................... 307,308,315
Power Steering ........................241
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ............... 326
Car Washes ............................ 335
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............... 71,273
CD (Compact Disc) Player ...............187,201
Cellular Phone ........................ 82,213
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............348
Chains, Tire ............................ 263
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 294
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 249
10
INDEX 391
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) .............168,309
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............71
Checks, Safety ........................... 71
Child Restraint ..........................62
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ............... 66
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts ...........65
Child Safety Locks ........................30
Child Seat .............................. 68
Clean Air Gasoline ....................... 270
Cleaning
Wheels ............................. 337
Climate Control ......................... 213
Clock ...........................187,189,203
Clutch ............................... 329
Clutch Fluid ........................... 329
Coin Holder ...........................148
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ............. 212
Compact Spare Tire ......................259
Compass .....................173,174,176,185
Compass Calibration .................. 176,185
Compass Variance ....................... 175
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 173
Console ..............................148
Contract, Service ........................ 383
Cool Down, Turbo .......................226
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................349,350
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........326
Cooling System ......................... 323
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............325
Coolant Level ......................323,327
Disposal of Used Coolant ................327
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................324
Inspection ...........................327
Points to Remember ....................328
Pressure Cap .........................326
Radiator Cap ......................... 326
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........... 324
392 INDEX
Corrosion Protection ..................... 334
Cruise Light ........................... 168
Cupholders ............................148
Customer Assistance .....................381
Data Recorder, Event ...................... 60
Dealer Service .......................... 311
Defroster, Rear Window ................... 154
Defroster, Windshield ................... 73,215
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................131
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................309
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................. 129
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle ....................331
Power Steering ........................241
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............327
Engine Oil ........................... 315
Door Locks .............................27
Door Locks, Automatic .................... 29
Door Opener, Garage .....................136
Downshifting .......................... 229
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ...................236
Through Flowing, Rising,
or Shallow Standing Water ............... 237
Electric Rear Window Defrost ............... 154
Electric Remote Mirrors ....................80
Electrical Power Outlets ................... 145
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......133
Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) ....................... 173,178
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking .............................294
Jump Starting .........................300
Towing ............................. 303
Emergency Seat Back Release (Sedan) ......... 122
10
INDEX 393
Emission Control System Maintenance ......309,354
Engine ............................ 307,308
Break-In Recommendations ................70
Checking Oil Level ..................... 312
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................... 323
Cooling .............................323
Exhaust Gas Caution .................. 71,273
Fuel Requirements ..................... 270
Jump Starting .........................300
Oil ........................... 312,349,350
Oil Change Interval ....................313
Oil Filler Cap ................... 307,308,315
Oil Filter ............................ 350
Oil Selection ..........................314
Oil Synthetic ......................... 315
Overheating ..........................292
Temperature Gauge .................... 164
Ethanol ...............................270
Event Data Recorder ...................... 60
Exhaust Gas Caution .............. 34,71,273,321
Exhaust System .......................71,321
Exterior Lights ..........................73
Fabric Care ............................338
Filler Location Fuel .................... 164,274
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................316
Automatic Transaxle ....................333
Engine Oil ........................ 316,350
Flashers ..............................292
Hazard Warning .......................292
Turn Signal ........................ 73,169
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 225
Fluid Capacities .........................349
Fluid Leaks .............................73
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle ....................331
Brake .............................. 329
394 INDEX
Cooling System ....................... 323
Power Steering ........................241
Fluids ................................350
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 350
Fog Light Service ........................347
Fog Lights ..........................128,172
Folding Front Passenger Seat ................ 113
Folding Rear Seat ........................116
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) .................. 116
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................302
Fuel .............................. 270,350
Adding ............................. 274
Additives ............................ 272
Capacity ............................349
Clean Air ............................ 270
Ethanol ............................. 270
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................164,274
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ................... 164
Gasoline ............................ 270
Gauge .............................. 164
Light ............................... 172
Materials Added .......................272
Methanol ............................270
Octane Rating ........................270
Requirements ......................... 270
Tank Capacity ........................349
Fuel System Caution .....................275
Fueling ............................... 274
Fuses ................................ 340
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........136
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............ 274,276,309
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................270
Gasoline (Fuel) ....................... 270,349
Gasoline, Reformulated ................... 270
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ................... 164
Fuel ...............................164
10
INDEX 395
Odometer ...........................167
Tachometer ..........................165
General Information ............... 18,25,110,269
General Maintenance ..................... 312
Glass Cleaning .......................... 339
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................. 279
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............277,278
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect威) ............... 82
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
or Shallow Standing Water ............... 237
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 292
Head Restraints ......................... 114
Headlights
Bulb Replacement ......................345
Cleaning ............................338
High Beam .......................... 129
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........129
Passing ............................. 130
Heated Seats ........................... 114
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................ 281
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 136
Hood Release ..........................123
Ignition ...............................12
Key ................................12
Ignition Key Removal .....................12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .................15,19
Infant Restraint .......................... 62
Information Center, Vehicle ................. 178
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 79
Instrument Cluster .................... 161,164
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............160
Instrument Panel Cover ................337,339
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............. 339
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............ 340
396 INDEX
Interior Appearance Care .................. 338
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ........... 131
Introduction ............................. 4
Jack Location ...........................294
Jack Operation .......................294,296
Jacking Instructions ...................... 296
Jump Starting ..........................300
Key, Programming ........................17
Key, Replacement ........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................15
Key-In Reminder .........................14
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) ................ 20
Keys .................................12
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................36
Latches ................................73
Hood .............................. 123
Lead Free Gasoline ...................... 270
Leaks, Fluid ............................ 73
Life of Tires ............................ 262
Liftgate (Sedan) ..........................33
Light Bulbs .......................73,344,345
Lights ..............................73,125
Airbag .......................... 59,73,173
Alarm ..............................172
Anti-Lock ........................... 172
Back-Up ............................348
Brake Warning ........................ 169
Center Mounted Stop ................... 348
Daytime Running ......................127
Engine Temperature Warning ..............171
Exterior .............................. 73
Fog .......................... 128,172,347
Front Replacement .....................345
High Beam Indicator .................... 173
Lights On Reminder ....................127
10
INDEX 397
Low Fuel ............................172
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........ 168
Map Reading ......................... 125
Oil Pressure ..........................173
Rear Servicing ........................347
Seat Belt Reminder ..................... 171
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............19,172
Service ............................. 345
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 168
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..............172
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ........ 165,265
Traction Control ....................... 247
Turn Signal ...................... 73,128,346
Voltage .............................169
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ..... 164
Loading Vehicle ...................... 276,278
Capacities ...........................278
Tires ............................... 252
Locks
Child Protection ........................30
Door ................................27
Power Door ........................... 28
Steering Wheel .........................14
Low Tire Pressure System ..................265
Lubrication, Body ....................... 319
Lumbar Support ........................ 112
Maintenance Free Battery ..................317
Maintenance, General ..................... 312
Maintenance Procedures ................... 312
Maintenance Schedule
Schedule “A”-Non Turbo ................368
Schedule “A”-Turbo ....................373
Schedule “B” ......................... 357
Schedule “B”-All Engines ................357
Maintenance Schedules .................... 354
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 168,309
398 INDEX
Manual, Service ......................... 385
Manual Transaxle .................. 224,226,334
Downshifting .........................229
Fluid Level Check .....................334
Frequency of Fluid Change ...............334
Lubricant Selection .....................334
Map/Reading Lights .....................125
Master Cylinder (Brakes) .................. 329
Methanol ............................. 270
Mini-Trip Computer ......................174
Mirrors ................................79
Electric Remote ........................80
Outside ..............................79
Rearview ............................. 79
Vanity ...............................81
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............265
Mopar Parts ......................... 311,384
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 70
Occupant Classification System (OCS) ..........50
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) .................35
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............270
Odometer .............................167
Trip .............................167,169
Oil, Engine .........................312,349
Capacity ............................349
Change Interval .......................313
Checking ............................ 312
Disposal ............................315
Filter ............................... 316
Identification Logo .....................314
Materials Added to ..................... 315
Quality .............................314
Recommendation ................... 314,349
Synthetic ............................315
Viscosity ............................315
Oil Filter, Selection .......................316
10
INDEX 399
Onboard Diagnostic System ................309
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ........... 136
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Outside Air Intake ....................... 220
Overdrive ............................. 233
Overheating, Engine ................... 164,292
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,385
Paint Care .............................334
Panel Rear Shelf ........................149
Panic Alarm ............................ 23
Parking Brake .......................... 241
Passing Light ...........................130
Personal Settings ........................181
Pets .................................. 70
Phone, Cellular ..........................82
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect威) ...............82
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 252
Power
Door Locks ...........................28
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .......... 145
Seats ............................... 111
Steering ..........................240,241
Sunroof ............................. 143
Windows .............................31
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............45
Preparation for Jacking .................... 296
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................43
Programmable Electronic Features ............ 181
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 23
Radial Ply Tires .........................259
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..........326
Radio Operation ...................187,201,213
Radio, Satellite (uconnect威 studios) ........... 209
400 INDEX
Radio (Sound Systems) .................187,201
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) ......................33
Rear Seat, Folding ..................... 116,118
Rear Seat Removal ....................... 120
Rear Shelf Panel ........................149
Rear Window ........................... 33
Rear Window Defroster ...................154
Rear Window Features .................... 154
Rear Wiper/Washer ...................... 155
Recorder, Event Data ...................... 60
Recreational Towing ......................290
Reformulated Gasoline ....................270
Refrigerant ............................ 319
Reminder, Seat Belt ....................... 44
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) ............... 20
Replacement Bulbs .......................344
Replacement Keys ........................ 16
Replacement Parts .......................311
Replacement Tires ....................... 262
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 384
Restraints, Child .......................62,68
Restraints, Infant ......................... 62
Rotation, Tires .......................... 264
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................72
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ............... 73
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................384
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................71
Safety Information, Tire ...................248
Safety Tips ............................. 71
Satellite Radio Antenna ................... 211
Satellite Radio (uconnect威 studios) ........... 209
Schedule, Maintenance .................... 354
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 340
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 44
Seat Belts .............................. 72
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .................. 43
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........43
10
INDEX 401
And Pregnant Women ................... 45
Child Restraint ........................ 62
Front Seat ............................ 36
Inspection ............................72
Pretensioners .......................... 43
Rear Seat .............................36
Untwisting Procedure .................... 42
Seat Belts (Sedan) ........................ 35
Seats .................................110
Emergency Seat Back Release (Sedan) ........122
Folding Front Passenger .................113
Head Restraints ....................... 114
Heated ............................. 114
Lumbar Support ....................... 112
Power .............................. 111
Rear Folding .......................116,118
Rear Folding (Sedan) ....................116
Removal ............................120
Tumbling Rear (Sedan) ..................118
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............324
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................15,19
Sentry Key Programming ................... 17
Service and Maintenance .................. 354
Service Assistance .......................381
Service Contract ......................... 383
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) ....................168
Service Manuals ........................ 385
Setting the Clock ..................187,189,203
Settings, Personal ........................181
Severe Service ..........................357
Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle ..............228
Shoulder Belts ........................... 36
Side Airbag ............................. 54
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) .......... 220
Signals, Turn .........................73,169
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............236
402 INDEX
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................263
Snow Tires ............................ 264
Spare Tire .......................... 259,295
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...........133,168
Speedometer ...........................165
Speedometer and Odometer ................ 161
Starting ............................... 224
Automatic Transmission .................224
Engine Fails to Start ....................225
Manual Transmission ...................224
Starting and Operating .................... 224
Starting Procedures ...................... 224
Steering
Power ...........................240,241
Tilt Column ..........................132
Wheel Lock ...........................14
Storage ............................147,344
Stuck, Freeing .......................... 302
Sun Roof .............................. 143
Sun Visor Extension ....................... 81
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........45
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................315
Tachometer ............................165
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ....... 164,293
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............66
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................18
Theft System (Security Alarm) ...............18
Tilt Steering Column ..................... 132
Tire and Loading Information Placard ......... 252
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............. 251
Tire Markings ..........................248
Tire Safety Information .................... 248
Tires ............................73,256,387
Aging (Life of Tires) ....................262
Air Pressure ..........................256
Chains .............................. 263
Changing ............................294
10
INDEX 403
Compact Spare ........................ 259
General Information .................... 256
High Speed ..........................259
Inflation Pressures .....................257
Jacking .............................294
Life of Tires .......................... 262
Load Capacity .....................252,253
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........265
Pressure Warning Light ..................165
Quality Grading .......................387
Radial ..............................259
Replacement ......................... 262
Rotation ............................ 264
Safety ........................... 248,256
Sizes ...............................249
Snow Tires ...........................264
Spare Tire ........................... 295
Spinning ............................ 260
Tread Wear Indicators ...................261
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............282
Towing ............................... 278
24-Hour Towing Assistance ................96
Disabled Vehicle ....................... 303
Guide .............................. 282
Recreational .......................... 290
Weight .............................. 282
Towing Assistance ........................ 96
Traction ..............................237
Traction Control ......................... 246
Traction Control Switch ...................246
Trailer Towing ..........................278
Cooling System Tips .................... 290
Hitches ............................. 281
Minimum Requirements ................. 283
Trailer and Tongue Weight ............... 282
Wiring .............................. 287
Trailer Towing Guide ..................... 282
Trailer Weight .......................... 282
404 INDEX
Transaxle .............................229
Additives ............................ 333
Automatic ....................12,224,229,331
Autostick ............................234
Filter ............................... 333
Maintenance .........................331
Manual ........................14,224,226
Operation ........................... 229
Overdrive ...........................233
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 136
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 23
Transporting Pets ........................ 70
Tread Wear Indicators ....................261
Trip Computer ..........................174
Trip Odometer ..........................167
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................169
Tumbling Rear Seat (Sedan) ................ 118
Turbo Cool Down .......................226
Turn Signals ......................... 128,169
uconnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) ...............82
Understanding Your Instrument Panel ......... 160
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 387
Universal Transmitter .....................136
Unleaded Gasoline .......................270
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .............. 42
Upholstery Care ........................338
Vanity Mirrors ...........................81
Variance, Compass .......................175
Vehicle Certification Label ................. 276
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............ 6
Vehicle Loading ................... 253,276,278
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 7
Vehicle Storage .........................344
10
INDEX 405
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .......... 18
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............164
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information .....................384
Washer, Rear ........................... 155
Washers, Windshield .....................132
Washing Vehicle ......................... 335
Water
Driving Through ......................237
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................337
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................337
Wind Buffeting ....................... 33,144
Window Fogging ........................ 220
Windows ..............................31
Windshield Defroster ......................73
Windshield Washers ................130,132,320
Fluid ...............................320
Windshield Wipers ....................130,320
Wiper, Rear ............................155
Wipers, Intermittent ...................... 131
406 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
$ISZTMFS--$
'JSTU&EJUJPO 1SJOUFEJO64"
